Owner’s Manual
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3, 4, 5), and “IMPORTANT NOTES”
(p. 6, 7, 8). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation
of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of
every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in its entirety.
The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference
202
Copyright © 2005 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE: NEUTRAL
BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
•
001 Before using this unit, make sure to read the
•
009 Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements
and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and
shock hazards!
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
..........................................................................................................
002a
•
Do not open or perform any internal modifica-
tions on the unit.
..........................................................................................................
•
010 This unit, either alone or in combination with an
..........................................................................................................
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
•
003 Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
004 Never use or store the unit in places that are:
..........................................................................................................
•
•
011 Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
..........................................................................................................
012a
•
Immediately turn the power off, remove the
power cord from the outlet, and request servicing
by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page when:
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been
damaged; or
•
007 Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
..........................................................................................................
008a
•
The unit should be connected to a power supply
only of the type described in the operating
instructions, or as marked on the rear of unit.
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally
or exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
008e
•
Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,
the supplied power cord must not be used with
any other device.
..........................................................................................................
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101a
•
•
013 In households with small children, an adult
The unit should be located so that its location or
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
position does not interfere with its proper venti-
lation.
..........................................................................................................
102b
..........................................................................................................
014 Protect the unit from strong impact.
•
Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
•
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
103a
•
015 Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to
•
At regular intervals, you should unplug the
power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to
wipe all dust and other accumulations away from
its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug
and the power outlet can result in poor insulation
and lead to fire.
share an outlet with an unreasonable number of
other devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
104 Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
•
016 Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
•
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
•
106 Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
..........................................................................................................
•
019 Batteries must never be recharged, heated, taken
the unit.
apart, or thrown into fire or water.
..........................................................................................................
107b
•
Never handle the power cord or its plugs with
wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging
from, an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
023 DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional
108d: Selection
•
•
If you need to move the instrument, take note of
the precautions listed below. At least two persons
are required to safely lift and move the unit. It
should be handled carefully, all the while keeping
it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect
yourself from injury and the instrument from
damage.
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.
Damage to speakers or other system components
may result.
..........................................................................................................
•
026 Do not put anything that contains water (e.g.,
1
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of
insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft
cloth.
• Check to make sure the screw securing the unit
to the stand have not become loose. Fasten
them again securely whenever you notice any
loosening.
2
3
..........................................................................................................
• Disconnect the power cord.
• Disconnect all cords coming from external
devices.
4
5
7
• Raise the adjusters on the stand (p. 19).
• Close the lid.
• Fold down the music rest.
..........................................................................................................
109a
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 18).
..........................................................................................................
110a
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out
of the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
111:ISfeulescetidonimproperly, batteries may explode or leak
and cause damage or injury. In the interest of
safety, please read and observe the following
precautions (p. 18).
1
2
• Carefully follow the installation instructions
for batteries, and make sure you observe the
correct polarity.
• Avoid using new batteries together with used
ones. In addition, avoid mixing different types
of batteries.
3
5
• Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to
remain unused for an extended period of time.
• If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth
or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the
discharge from the battery compartment. Then
install new batteries. To avoid inflammation of
the skin, make sure that none of the battery
discharge gets onto your hands or skin.
Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the
discharge gets near your eyes. Immediately
rinse the affected area with running water if
any of the discharge has entered the eyes.
6
• Never keep batteries together with metallic
objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces,
hairpins, etc.
..........................................................................................................
•
112 Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance
with whatever regulations for their safe disposal
that may be observed in the region in which you
live.
• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been
damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally
or exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
•
116 Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you
do not get your fingers pinched (p. 18). Adult
supervision is recommended whenever small
children use the unit.
..........................................................................................................
•
118cAlways keep the following parts including with
the KR107 and small components that may be
removed out of the reach of small children to
avoid accidental ingestion of these parts.
Included Parts
• External memory anti-theft lock securing screw
Removable parts
• Screws fastening the stand
• Screws fastening music rest
• the thumbscrew fastening the headphone hook
..........................................................................................................
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
291b
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2 and 3,
please read and observe the following:
Power Supply
•
•
359 Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument.
Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior
finish.
301 Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being
used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter
(such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air
conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in
which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may
cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it
is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power
supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet.
Maintenance
401b
•
To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is slightly
dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using an equal amount
of strength, moving the cloth along with the grain of the wood.
Rubbing too hard in the same area can damage the finish.
306b
•
Batteries are supplied with the unit. The life of these batteries
may be limited, however, since their primary purpose was to
enable testing.
•
402 Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to
avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
403 The pedals of this unit are made of brass.
•
307 Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to
•
all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to
speakers or other devices.
Brass eventually darkens as the result of the natural oxidization
process. If the brass becomes tarnished, polish it using commer-
cially available metal polisher.
•
308 Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER
switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been
completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to
turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch,
then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this
reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power
cord’s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily
accessible.
Repairs and Data
•
452 Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s memory may
be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should
always be backed up on an external memory, or written down on
paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid
the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry
related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
Placement
•
351 Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move
it farther away from the source of interference.
Additional Precautions
•
352a
•
551 Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably
This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do
not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.
lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the
unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important
data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of
important data you have stored in the unit’s memory on an
external memory.
352b
•
Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such
as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise
could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while
conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance
from this unit, or switch them off.
•
552 Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of
data that was stored on an external memory once it has been lost.
Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of
data.
354b
•
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices
that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise
subject it to temperature extremes. Also, do not allow lighting
devices that normally are used while their light source is very
close to the unit (such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to
shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
•
553 Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons,
sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and
connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
•
554 Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
•
556 When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector
355b
•
When moved from one location to another where the temper-
itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing
shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
ature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (conden-
sation) may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may
result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore,
before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several
hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated.
•
557 A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal
operation.
558a
•
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume
at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you
do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially
when it is late at night).
•
356 Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain on the
unit for long periods of time. Such objects can discolor or
otherwise harmfully affect the finish.
358 Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can
559b
•
•
When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-absorbent
be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce
sound.
material. Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to
become scratched or damaged, and could lead to malfunction.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling CD-ROMs
•
•
560 Do not apply undue force to the music rest while it is in use.
561 Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold separately).
801 Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded
•
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be
read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially
available CD cleaner.
•
562 Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some
other make of connection cable, please note the following precau-
tions.
Before Using External
Memory
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables
that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use
of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low,
or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications,
contact the manufacturer of the cable.
Using External Memory
•
565 Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure
705
• Never touch the terminals of the External memory. Also,
that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the
instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the
keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of
this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting
trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must
immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord
from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from
whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest
Roland Service Center.
avoid getting the terminals dirty.
708
• External memories are constructed using precision
components; handle the cards carefully, paying particular
note to the following.
• To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity,
be sure to discharge any static electricity from your
own body before handling the cards.
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with
the contact portion of the cards.
Handling Floppy Disks
(Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive)
• Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or
vibration.
•
651 Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of
• Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles,
or other such locations (storage temperature: 0 to 50˚
C).
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to
enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface
area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following
when handling floppy disks:
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g.,
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended
temperature range: 10 to 50˚C (50 to 122˚F).
• Do not allow cards to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify the cards.
704 (revise)
• When connecting external memory, make sure to press it
until it is fully inserted.
• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as
those generated by loudspeakers.
652 Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect the
disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be
kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position
• Insert the external memory in the External Memory port
evenly and without undue force. Forcing the external
memory may damage the External Memory port.
•
• Do not insert any object other than the external memory
(e.g., wires, coins, other types of disks, etc.) in the External
Memory port. This may damage the External Memory
port.
only when you wish to write new data onto the disk.
fig.DiskProtect.e
Rear side of the disk
• Do not subject the External Memory port cover or
connected External memory to excessive stress.
Write
• Close the external memory cover when using the External
memory for extended periods
(can write new data onto disk)
Protect
Write Protect Tab
(prevents writing to disk)
•
653 The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk.
Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may
be difficult to remove the disk.
203
*
GS (
ration.
) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-
) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corpo-
•
654 Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to
protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty
or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as
causing the disk drive to malfunction.
*
XG lite (
ration.
•
655 Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be
*
207 Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple
locked (have their write protect tab slid to the “Protect” position)
before you insert them into the drive on some other unit (except
the PR-300, or a product in the HP-G, HPi, MT, KR, or Atelier
families), or into a computer’s drive. Otherwise (if the write
protect tab remains in the “Write” position), when you perform
any disk operations using the other device’s disk drive (such as
checking the contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk
rendering the disk unreadable by this unit’s disk drive.
Computer, Inc.
*
220 All product names mentioned in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR Intelligent Piano.
While the KR Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano performances, it also
features easy-to-use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other useful functions. In order to
enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read
through this manual in its entirety.
Main Features
❍ Lusciously Resounding, Richly Expressive Piano Sound
The KR107 reproduces the rich tones of a high-quality grand piano, from the sounds of the hammers
as they strike the strings to the sounds made as the keys are released. 128-voice polyphony ensures
full responsiveness, even with heavy use of the pedals.
What’s more, The “Piano Designer” feature allows you to create your own favorite piano tones.
❍ True Grand Piano Feel
The KR107 features Roland’s Progressive Hammer Action keyboard, which reproduces the feel of a
grand piano, with a firm, weighty touch in the lower registers and a lighter response in the upper
registers. This keyboard also faithfully reproduces the distinctive “click” that’s produced when a
grand piano’s keys are played (Escapement function).
In addition to the ability of adjusting the key weight, a “Hammer Response” function, which
reproduces the subtle action of the hammers, is also incorporated, so there are two key-touch controls
that come into play when determining the precise character of the keyboard. Additionally, the
instrument’s pedals are firm and responsive, lending your performances fuller and more detailed
expressiveness.
❍ Accomplish Tasks Easily with the Main Buttons
Almost all of the KR’s common functions, including playing back songs, displaying notations,
running the automatic accompaniment, selecting tones, and so on can be accomplished using the Main
buttons to the left of the screen.
❍ A Wealth of Practice Features to Foster Musical Growth
Use the “Visual Lesson” feature for enjoyable practice and steady improvement.
You can use this function to score the results of your performances and find out which notes have been
played differently than those indicated in the notation.
The KR also scrolls the notation automatically as you play, making your practices even more
convenient.
❍ Connector Allows Enlarged Display of Notation and Lyrics
The KR107 is equipped with a connector for use with televisions and other external displays.
Connecting a large screen to the KR107 allows you to display a greater number of measures at the
same time.
❍ Easy-To-Use “Music Assistant” Automatic Accompaniment
Feature
You can select from an amazing 500 settings to get automatic accompaniment that perfectly matches
the song you are playing.
Each song’s Music Assistant settings are shown in a manner that is easy to grasp, so playing along
with the changes in the accompaniment is a snap.
For easy enjoyment of Music Assistant, the KR107 also includes songs that you can perform while
reading the chord charts.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
❍ Color Display for Easy Operation
The KR107 features a color screen touch panel with rich graphics to make viewing easier. Operations
can be carried out easily, just by touching the screen.
❍ Utilizes External Memory–the New Media
You can save song data created on the KR107 to External memory (sold separately). Extremely
portable, high-capacity external memory also connects easily to computers, allowing song data to be
transferred easily. Taking further advantage of the high-capacity memory, you can also play back
audio files with the KR107.
How To Use This Manual
The KR Owner’s Manual consists of three volumes, Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, and the USB
Install Guide.
Please start out by reading “Before You Start Playing” (p. 17) in the Owner’s Manual (this volume).
This explains how to connect the KR’s power cord and how to turn on the instrument’s power.
After turning on the KR’s power, please continue by reading Quick Start.
By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start, you can easily learn how to play
the KR and make use of its major functions (especially procedures that involve use of the “main
buttons”).
The Owner’s Manual describes procedures, from basic operation to procedures for special
applications (for example, using the KR as an accompanist and creating songs), that will help you
master the KR’s many performance functions.
When connecting a computer to the USB port, be sure to read the USB Install Guide. This describes
the procedure for installing the driver needed to connect via USB.
*
For more on system requirements, refer to the “USB Installation Guide.” However, note that the
KR107 is not compatible with Mac OS 9.
■ Conventions Used in This Manual
This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.
• Button names are enclosed in square brackets “[ ]”, as in One Touch Program [Piano]
button.
• For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual
screens and colors.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Exit>.
• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.”
NOTE
• An asterisk (*) or a
at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or
precaution. These should not be ignored.
• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY ................................................. 3
IMPORTANT NOTES............................................................ 6
(One-Touch Piano) ............................................................... 22
Introduction.................................................8
Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects...... 24
Main Features.......................................................................... 8
How To Use This Manual ..................................................... 9
Conventions Used in This Manual ................................. 9
(Tone Search).................................................................... 25
Performing with Multiple Sounds Layered Together
(Split)...................................................................................... 27
Performance Pads............................................................ 14
Rear Panel.............................................................................. 16
Bottom Panel......................................................................... 16
Bottom Panel (Front Left)............................................... 16
Bottom Panel (Front Right)............................................ 16
(Octave Shift).................................................................... 28
Main Screens ......................................................................... 21
Piano Screen..................................................................... 21
Basic Screen...................................................................... 21
Using the Main Icons ...................................................... 21
The [Option] Button and The [Exit] Button................. 21
The Scroll Bar and The Page Icon ................................. 21
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects) ............................ 36
Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files..... 43
Using the Metronome.......................................................... 44
(One-Touch Arranger)......................................................... 48
About Chords................................................................... 49
(Style Search).................................................................... 52
Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment ..................... 55
Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously
When You Play the Keyboard (Sync Start).................. 55
Stopping Automatic Accompaniment.......................... 56
Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
(Countdown).................................................................... 57
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Placing a Marker within a Song .................................... 85
Playback from a Marker Location................................. 86
Moving a Marker............................................................. 86
Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen..... 59
(Style Orchestrator)......................................................... 59
Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back
(Melody Intelligence)........................................................... 60
Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance
(Lower Tone)......................................................................... 61
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part
(Balance)................................................................................. 63
Changing the Volume Balance Between the
(Balance Knob)................................................................. 63
Using External Memories.................................................... 99
Connecting and Ejecting an External Memory ........... 99
Formatting Media (Format) ......................................... 100
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance
(Song Search).................................................................... 68
Removing Songs From Favorites .................................. 70
Using the Remote Control................................................... 71
About the Remote Control............................................. 72
Chapter 4 Practice Functions..................74
Calling Up Saved User Programs .................................... 109
Displaying the Notation...................................................... 74
Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds
Called Up........................................................................ 109
(AutoSync DigiScore) ..................................................... 75
Saving the User Program Sets .......................................... 109
the Notation Display....................................................... 76
Saving Notations as Image Data ................................... 79
Memory to External Memories.................................... 112
(Tap Tempo)..................................................................... 81
Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs...................... 112
Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute)........... 82
Selecting the Pedal Used for Switching Settings
(Pedal Shift).................................................................... 112
Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing
(Count In) .............................................................................. 83
Sequential Loading of User Program Sets Stored
(Load Next)..................................................................... 112
Muting Some Parts Before Playing (Track Buttons)........ 84
Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker) ............. 85
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Yourself (Style Converter)............................................ 132
Saving a User Style............................................................. 135
Deleting Saved User Styles .......................................... 136
to External Memories.................................................... 137
The 16-Track Sequencer Screen................................... 114
Modifying the Settings of Each Part........................... 115
the Musical Genre (Tone Set)....................................... 116
Changing the Recording Method (Rec Mode) ............... 117
Changing the Settings for One-Touch Arranger............ 138
Adjusting the Keyboard Touch (Key Touch) ............ 138
(Replace Recording)...................................................... 118
Changing Music Styles Without Changing
Sounds (Mix Recording)............................................... 118
Repeated Recording at the Same Location
(Arranger Config).......................................................... 139
Changing the Tuning (Tuning) ................................... 143
Inserting Blank Measures (Insert)............................... 125
Transposing Individual Parts (Transpose) ................ 125
(Pedal Setting/User Functions)................................... 144
Changing Standard Pitch (Master Tune) ................... 146
Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and
External Displays
Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is
Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song
Changing the Functions of the Remote Control’s
Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs ....................... 128
Changing the Tempo Within the Song............................ 128
Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure .......... 129
Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch Screen) ........... 150
Selecting the Part to Which the Effect is Added
(EffectsPart) ......................................................................... 151
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles...........130
Formatting the User Memory........................................... 152
Automatically Starting the Quick Tour........................... 152
Adjusting the Piano Designer Resonance....................... 153
Creating Original Styles (User Styles)............................. 130
Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music
Styles (Style Composer)................................................ 130
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Panel Lock)......................................................................... 153
Internal Song List ............................................................... 182
Music Files That the KR Can Use..................................... 185
About the KR Sound Generator .................................. 185
Main Specifications ............................................................ 187
Detailed Song Playback Settings...................................... 154
Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs
Viewing Song Information (Information)................. 154
During SMF Playback (Track Assign)........................ 155
External Devices.....................................156
Explanation of Each Items............................................ 158
Connecting Video Equipment (V-LINK) ........................ 159
Connectors...................................................................... 160
Making the Connections .............................................. 160
(MIDI Ensemble) ................................................................ 161
Selecting the Transmit Channel (Tx Channel) .......... 162
Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and
Making the Connections .............................................. 164
Connecting a Computer .................................................... 165
Connect to the MIDI Connectors ................................ 165
Connect to the USB Connector.................................... 165
Making the Settings for the USB Driver..................... 166
Troubleshooting.................................................................. 167
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
3
5
7
9
11
12
14
18 19 20
2
4
1
6
8 10
13
15
16 17
21
22
Power
1. [Power] switch
13.[1]–[3] buttons
Pressed to switch the power on and off (p. 18).
buttons numbered 11-12.
2. [Volume] knob
14.Music Style buttons
Adjusts the overall volume (p. 19).
51).
Pressing the [User] button selects a User Style that
you’ve made yourself or a Music Style on external
memory (p. 53).
3. [Sound Control] button
Add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and
distinctness.
4. [Brilliance] knob
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (p. 19).
15.Fill In buttons
Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and
changes the accompaniment pattern (p. 58).
[To Variation] button
5. [Part Balance] button
performance parts (p. 63).
[To Original] button
6. [Balance] knob
16.[Intro/Ending] button
Play an intro or ending during automatic
accompaniment (p. 55).
keyboard and for songs and accompaniments (p. 63).
7. [Transpose] button
17.[Start/Stop] button
Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being
played (p. 88).
Starts and stops automatic accompaniment (p. 55).
18.[Count/Marker] button
8. [Vocal Effect] Button
microphone (p. 36).
These allow you to add and move markers in the
notation as well as repeat playback of song segments
simply and easily (p. 85).
9. [Ambience/Reverb] button
Adds reverberation to the sound (p. 29).
Adds three-dimensional breadth to the sound (p. 31).
19.Beat Indicator
This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the
selected song or accompaniment.
10.[User Program] button
108).
20.[Metronome] button
Activates the built-in metronome (p. 44).
Performance Pads
21.Tempo [-] [+] buttons
Adjusts the tempo.
11.[Style Orchestrator] button
This is used to change the arrangement type for
automatic accompaniment with the Performance Pads
(p. 58).
Press the [-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to
the original tempo.
12.[User Function] button
This is used to assign a variety of functions to the
Performance Pads (p. 144).
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
40
23
24
27
28
31
32 38
2526
29
30
33 34 35 36 37
39
22. Main Buttons
→ See the Quick Start
[Song/File] button
31.[Menu] button
You can select functions for playing back, recording or
Use this button to select internal songs or songs from
external memories (p. 65).
[DigiScore] button
Displays notations (p. 74).
[Visual Lesson] button
editing a song (p. 97,p. 114, p. 130, p. 154).
32.Track buttons
Used to play back or record each track of a song (p. 84, p.
96).
You can use the practice function.
[Piano Designer] button (p. 153)
[Music Assistant] button (p. 153)
[Super Tones] button
33.[
(Reset)] button
Resets the song playback-start location to the beginning
of the song.
34.[
(Play/Stop)] button
23.Touch Screen
Starts and stops playback or recording a song.
This lets you perform a variety of operations just by
35.[
(Rec)] button
touching the screen (p. 20).
When pressed, this button places the instrument in
recording standby (p. 91, p. 114).
24.Dial
Use this to change on-screen values.
36.[
Rewinds the song.
37.[
(Bwd)] button
25.[Exit] button
Returns you to the previous screen.
(Fwd)] button
Fast-forwards the song.
Displays a screen for advance function settings.
38.Infrared Receiver
27.Contrast knob
remote control to operate the KR107 (p. 72).
28.[Tone] buttons
39.[Wonderland/Game] button
Here you can learn about instruments while having fun.
→ See the Quick Start
Select the Tones that will be played from the keyboard
(p. 23).
29.One Touch Program button
[Piano] button
40.External Memory port
Connects an external memory to play (p. 65) and save songs (p.
22).
99).
[Arranger] button
Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic
accompaniment (p. 48).
*
Be sure to close the cover of the External Memory port after
connecting USB memory to the External Memory port.
30.[Melody Intelligence] button
Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard
(p. 60).
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Rear Panel
fig.panelRear
4
5
7
1
2
3
1. Speaker jack
4. Expression pedal jack
Connect the speaker cable of the stand (p. 17).
You can connect an expression pedal to the KR (p. 156).
2. Ext Display connector
the screen and display lyrics (p. 156).
This cannot be used simultaneously with the Video Out
jack.
Connect the pedal cable of the stand to this connector (p.
17).
6. Input jacks
These jacks can be connected to another sound
generating device or an audio device, so that the sound
of that device will be output from the KR’s speakers (p.
163).
3. Video Out jack
Connect a television here. This allows you to display the
notations and lyrics on the connected television set (p.
157).
This cannot be used simultaneously with the Ext Display
connector.
7. Output jacks
These jacks can be connected to your audio system to
enjoy more powerful sound. They can also be connected
Bottom Panel
Bottom Panel (Front Left)
Bottom Panel (Front Right)
fig.panelbottom
fig.panelUSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Phones jacks
6. Floppy disk drive connector
Connects an optional floppy disk drive to play and save
songs.
A set of headphones can be connected here (p. 19).
2. Mic Volume knob
*
Use floppy disk drive available from Roland.
Adjusts the volume level for the microphone (p. 20).
3. Mic In jack
Used for connecting microphones (p. 20).
4. MIDI Out/In connectors
These can be connected to an external MIDI device to
exchange performance data (p. 160).
5. USB connector
You can connect a computer and exchange performance
data between the instrument and the computer (p. 165).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Connect the Pedal Cable
Connect the Power Cord
Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the
Insert the included power cord into the AC inlet on the
bottom panel of the KR107, and then plug it into an
electrical outlet.
rear panel of the KR107.
fig.00-01
NOTE
Be sure to use the supplied power cord.
fig.00-02
Connect the Speaker Cable
As shown in the diagram, connect the speaker cable
leading from the speaker box of the stand to the speaker
connector located on the rear bottom panel of the KR107.
Setting Up the Music Rest
1. Grasping the music rest with both hands, lift it toward
Push the speaker cable in until it clicks into position.
you until its in the upright position.
2. Use the support on the back of the music rest to keep
KR107 Rear
the stand in place.
The angle of the music rest can be set to any of three
positions.
fig.mu_stand
Speaker connector
Clip portion
Speaker cable
1
2
NOTE
Do not place containers holding liquids (such as flower vases),
insecticide, perfume, alcohol, or similar substances on top of this
piano.
The speakers of this piano are mounted beneath the upper surface,
and face upwards. Malfunctions or accidents may occur if liquids
contact any part of the speakers.
■ Folding Down the Music Rest
1. Raise the support located on the back of the music rest,
then gently fold down the music rest.
Speakers
■ Using the Music Holders
You can use the holders to hold pages in place.
When not using the holders, leave them folded down.
fig.mu_stand4
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
■ Removing the Music Rest
Opening/Closing the Lid
You can remove the music rest from the piano.
To open the lid, use both hands to lift it lightly, and
slide it away from yourself.
This allows you to place a notebook computer on the piano.
Position the music rest so it’s upright, then remove the
two screws, as shown.
To close the lid, pull it gently toward yourself, and
lower it softly after it has been fully extended.
fig.00-05
You can remove the screws using a coin.
fig.mu_stand3
NOTE
When opening and closing the lid, be careful not to let your fingers
get caught. If small children will be using the KR107, adult
supervision should be provided.
NOTE
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the screws that you removed from the music
rest, or put them where they might be swallowed by small children.
If you need to move the piano, make sure the lid is closed first to
prevent accidents.
Installing Batteries in the
Remote Control
Turning the Power On and
Off
Install the batteries provided in the remote control.
fig.Remote Control-1.j
NOTE
Remote Control’s (Rear)
Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By
turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction
and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
941
To turn the power on, turn the [Volume] knob all the
way down, and then press the [Power] switch.
Remote
Control’s
Cover
The power will turn on, and the Power indicator at the
left front of the KR107 will light.
After a few seconds, you will be able to play the
keyboard to produce sound.
Use the [Volume] knob to adjust the volume.
1. Open the battery cover on the back of the remote
NOTE
control.
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few
seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate
normally.
2. Insert the supplied AA batteries, as shown in the figure
of remote control.
942
fig.00-06.e
3. Close the battery cover.
Power
NOTE
Be careful to observe the correct polarity (+, - direction) when
installing the batteries.
Power Indicator
For more information on the remote control button functions, refer
to “Using the Remote Control” (p. 71).
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
when placing the instrument on carpet, adjust this so
that the pedals firmly contact the floor.
To turn the power off, turn the [Volume] knob all the
way to the left, and press the [Power] switch.
fig.00-09.j
The Power indicator at the left front of the KR107 will go
dark, and the power will be turned off.
•
945 If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the
POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 6).
Adjuster
About the Pedals
The pedals have the following functions, and are used
Adjusting the Sound’s
Volume and Brilliance
mainly for piano performance.
fig.00-08.e
Turn the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall volume.
Turn the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the brightness of
the sound.
fig.00-07.e
Soft Pedal
Damper Pedal
Sostenuto Pedal
Damper pedal (right pedal)
While this pedal is pressed, notes will be sustained even after
you take your fingers off the keys.
Connecting Headphones
The length of the sustain changes subtly according to the
extent to which the pedal is depressed.
The KR107 has two jacks for plugging in headphones. This
allows two people to listen through headphones
simultaneously, making it very useful for lessons and when
performing piano pieces for four hands. Additionally, this
allows you to play without having to worry about bothering
others around you, even at night.
On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal will
allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the
sounds that you played from the keyboard, adding a rich
resonance.
The KR107 simulates this damper resonance.
Plug the headphones into the Phones jack located at the
bottom left of the piano.
You can change the amount of resonance applied with the damper
pedal. Please refer to “[Piano Designer] button” in the Quick Manual.
Connecting headphones will automatically mute the
sound from the internal speakers.
The headphone volume is adjusted by the [Volume]
Sostenuto pedal (center pedal)
knob of the KR107.
fig.00-04.e
This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were
already played when you pressed the pedal.
Soft pedal (left pedal)
When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard, the
sound will have a softer tone.
The softness of the sound changes subtly depending on the
extent to which the pedal is depressed.
Phones jack x 2
About the Adjuster
When you move the KR107 or if you feel that the pedals are
unstable, adjust the adjuster located below the pedals as
follows.
NOTE
Use Stereo headphones.
❍
Rotate the adjuster to lower it so that it is in firm contact
with the floor. If there is a gap between the pedals and
the floor, the pedals may be damaged. In particular
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Some Notes on Using Headphones
• To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones
Some Notes on Using a Microphone
• Be careful of high volume levels when using microphone
late at night or early in the morning.
only by the headset or the plug.
• Connecting the headphones when the volume of
connected equipment is turned up may result in damage
to the headphones. Lower the volume on the KR107
before plugging in the headphones.
• When connecting a microphone to the KR107, be sure to
lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when
the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by
the speakers.
• Listening at excessively high volume levels will not only
damage the headphones, but may also cause hearing
loss. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level.
• Howling could be produced depending on the location
of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from
speakers.
■ Using the Headphone Hook
Whenever you are not using the headphones, you can hang them on
the headphone hook at the lower left of the KR107.
3. Lowering volume levels.
983
Attaching the Headphone Hook
Press and twist the headphone hook included with the KR107 into
the hole in the bottom of the KR107 (refer to the figure below).
Turn the headphone hook thumbscrew to secure the headphone
hook.
About the Touch Screen
The KR makes use of a touch screen.
This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by
touching the screen lightly.
NOTE
The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger.
to operate the touch screen.
Thumbscrew
NOTE
The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced due to
changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this
happens, follow the steps in “Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch
Screen)” (p. 150) to correct the pointer position.
Connecting a Microphone
You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack, and enjoy
karaoke with the KR107.
fig.00-10
NOTE
Mic In jack
Mic Volume knob
Do not place items on the touch screen.
■ Adjusting the Contrast of the
Screen
To adjust the contrast of the screen, turn the Contrast
knob located at the right side of the screen.
1. Connect a microphone (sold separately) to the Mic In
jack on the lower-left area of the instrument.
2. Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob on left side of the Mic In
jack to adjust the volume level for the microphone.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
When you select an internal song or music
files that includes the lyrics data, this icon
appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.
Main Screens
■ Piano Screen
Immediately after the power is turned on, the Piano screen
like the one below is displayed. For details, refer to p. 22.
NOTE
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict
what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display
may not always match what appears in the manual.
985
■ The [Option] Button and The
[Exit] Button
■ Basic Screen
The following screen is called Basic screen.
Song name or
Music Style name
Tempo
Beat Measure
The [Option] Button
The Tone names are
selected appear.
This displays a screen for advance function settings.
The screen that opens differs depending on the screen that
was displayed when the button was pressed.
These information are
displayed, when you use the
automatic accompaniment.
The [Exit] Button
Touch to cancel the settings currently being made and close
the screen displayed. Normally, pressing the [Exit] button
one or more times returns you to the Basic screen.
You can usually display this screen by pressing [Exit] button
several times.
Follow either of the procedures described below to display it.
• Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for
automatic accompaniment.
■ The Scroll Bar and The Page
Icon
The Song and Tone selection screens feature a scroll bar at
the right of the screen list, with page icons at the top and
bottom of the scroll bar.
• Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, then press
one of the Tone buttons, then press the [Exit] button.
Page icon
Scroll bar
■ Using the Main Icons
You can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do
things. The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional
work like buttons. These are called “Icons.”
Page icon
The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows.
Some screens consist on two or more pages.
You can display the next page or the previous
page of the screen by touching these icons.
Touch the scroll bar and drag up and down to scroll through
the list.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano
(One-Touch Piano)
You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single
button.
fig.panel1-1
1.
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
Since this instrument faithfully
action and response, keys
played in the top one-and-one-
half-octave range continue to
resonate, regardless of the
damper pedal action, and the
tone in this range is audibly
different. The Key Transpose
setting (p. 88) can also be used
to change the range that is
unaffected by the damper
pedal.
A “Piano screen” like the one shown below will appear.
fig.d-piano.eps_60
You can change the piano
performance settings by
touching the [Piano Designer]
button. For more details, refer
to “[Piano Designer] Button”
in the Quick Start.
following settings, regardless of the current panel settings.
• If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections (p. 27), the
keyboard returns to a single section.
• The pedals return to their usual functions (p. 19).
• The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected.
• The effect is automatically set to “Damper Resonance” (p. 36).
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
the lyrics data, <
>
appears in the Piano screen or
Basic screen. Touch this to
display the lyrics.
<
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 31).
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Performing with a Variety of Tones
(Tone Buttons)
The KR comes with a many built-in instrument sounds and effects. This lets you
For more about the names of
Tones, take a look at the “Tone
List” (p. 172).
enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles.
The built-in sounds are called “Tones.” The sounds are organized into six tone
groups, which are assigned to the Tone buttons.
fig.panel1-2
1.
Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group.
You’ll see that button’s indicator light up.
The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group you’ve selected.
fig.d-tonesel.eps_60
This screen is called the “Tone selection screen.”
Tones indicated by
recommended.
is called an “EX voice.” These voices are especially
Tones indicated by a red
mark produce the “Key Off Sound.”
What “Key Off Sound” does is recreate the tonal changes produced when the fingers
are released from the keys.
Tones indicated by “GS” is GS tones.
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other tones.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
You can touch <Audition> for an audio demonstration of a particular tone.
You can touch <Effects> to add effect sounds to a variety of tones (p. 36).
You can do searches for tones according to search parameters or by name by
touching <Search> (p. 25).
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
2.
Touch a tone name to select the tone.
You’ll hear the tone you’ve selected when you play the keyboard.
You can use the dial to scroll through the screen as you switch the Tones to be
played.
3.
Press the [Exit] button.
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
■ Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects
You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal
sounds.
fig.panel1-2
1.
2.
Press the [Super Tones] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch < > < > several times to display the “Drums” screen or the
“SFX (SOUND EFFECT)” screen.
fig.d-drum.eps_60
Drum screen
SFX screen
Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound.
You can also have play sounds by touching the screen.
The combination of sounds
assigned to the keyboard
varies according to the drum
set. Take a look at the “Drum
Set List” (p. 174) and “SFX Set”
(p. 177).
You can select other drum tones by pressing the <
> or <
> buttons.
3.
Press the [Exit] button several times.
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search)
You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical
style. You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name.
1.
2.
Press any Tone button.
The tone selection screen appears.
Touch <Search>.
The following “Tone search screen” appears.
fig.d-tonesrch1.eps_60
Condition Search screen
Name Search screen
Touch here to switch these screens.
Searching by Conditions
3.
4.
Touch <Category> or <Genre>, then use the dial to select the search
conditions.
In condition search, tones
satisfying all of the selected
search criteria are sought.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the tone name to select the tone.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the tone selection screen.
Searching by Tone Name
3
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to go to the condition search screen.
4.
Decide which character is to be used for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you’re searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touching <A-0> selects the type of character. Each time you touch <A-0>, the
character switches between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the tone name to select the Tone.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous
screen.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Performing with Multiple Sounds
Layered Together (Layer)
Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a “layer
performance.”
For instance, it’s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously.
fig.layer.e
Grand Piano 1
Strings 1
When you select an internal
Strings 2
song or music file that includes
1.
Touch <Layer 1>.
the lyrics data, <
>
appears in the Basic screen.
fig.d-layer.eps_60
Touch this to display the lyrics.
<
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 31).
The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance, plus the tone
indicated in the lower part of the display, are now played together.
<-><+> on the tone selection
screen, the pitch of the
Here, the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the “upper tone,”
and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the “layer tone.”
In the same manner, you can touch <Layer 2> to layer further sounds.
keyboard’s sound is changed
in octave units. To learn more,
see “Shifting the Keyboard
Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave
Shift)” (p. 28).
Changing the Tones
2.
Touch the name of the tone to be changed.
Touch here to highlight the tone name.
3.
4.
Press a Tone button to select the new tone (p. 23).
When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button.
You can change the balance of
the right-hand and Layer Tone
volume. For instructions, see
“Adjusting the Volume
The display returns to the Basic screen.
Cancelling the Layer
Balance for Each Performance
Part (Part Balance)” (p. 63).
5.
Touch <Layer 1>.
Touch <Layer 2> to have <Layer 2> play as well.
The <Layer 1> and <Layer 2> icons are dimmed, and the Layer performance is
cancelled.
Now when you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Playing Different Tones with the Left
and Right Hands (Split)
Dividing the keyboard into right-hand and left-hand areas, then playing different
sounds in each section is called “split performance.” The boundary key is called the
“split point.”
The split point key is included in the left-hand keyboard area. Each time power to
You can change the split point;
refer to “Changing the
Keyboard’s Split Point (Split
Point)” (p. 139).
the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to “F#3.”
fig.split.e
Split Point
Acoustic Bass
Grand Piano 1
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
1.
At the Basic screen, touch <Split>.
fig.d-split.eps_60
the lyrics data, <
>
appears in the Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.
<
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 31).
The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right-hand section
of the keyboard, and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
Here, the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the “upper tone,”
<-> <+> in the tone selection
screen, the pitch of the
You can turn the tones on and off by touching <Lower 1> or <Lower 2>.
Changing the Tones
keyboard’s sound is changed
in octave units. To learn more,
see “Shifting the Keyboard
Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave
Shift)” (p. 28).
2.
3.
4.
Touch the name of the tone to be changed.
Press a Tone button to select the tone (p. 23).
When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
You can change the volume
balance between the upper and
lower parts of the keyboard;
refer to “Adjusting the Volume
Balance for Each Performance
Part (Part Balance)” (p. 63).
Cancelling the Split
5.
Touch <Split>.
The <Split> icons are dimmed, and the Split performance is cancelled.
When you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously
Turning on either Layer Performance or Split Performance allows you to divide the
keyboard into a upper and a lower part and play with twoTones layered in the lower
When the keyboard has been
sections, the damper pedal is
section. If you want to add
lingering reverberations to the
notes of the lower section, see
“Assigning Functions to
part, and three Tones layered in the upper part.
fig.d-layersplit.eps_60
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User
Functions)” (p. 144).
■ Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps
(Octave Shift)
When using layer performance (p. 26) or split performance (p. 27), you can change
the pitch of the keyboard’s sound in octave units. This function is called “Octave
Shift.”
For example, when playing a Layer performance, if you change the pitch of one of
the tones and then layer it, it changes the impression created with the tone.
1.
On the Basic screen, touch <Layer1> or <Split>.
The KR switches to layer performance or split performance.
2.
3.
To apply Octave Shift, touch the name of the tone you’ve selected.
Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen.
fig.d-octshift.eps_60
4.
Touch Octave <-> or <+> in the lower part of the screen to adjust the
pitch of the sound.
Each time you touch <+>, the pitch is raised one octave.
Each time you touch <->, the pitch is lowered one octave.
The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound (-2) to
two octaves above the original (+2).
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb)
Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KR.
Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall.
fig.panel1-3
1.
2.
Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the its indicator light up.
A “Reverb screen” like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-reverb.eps_60
Touch an icon to select the performance space.
;
Display
Hall1
Explanation
Hall with bright reverberation
Hall2
Hall with warm reverberation
Room reverberation
Room1
Cathedral
Ground
Room2
High-ceilinged cathedral
Wide open space with no reverberations
Small room
Lounge
Studio
Larger room
A recording studio
Gymnasium
Hall3
In a gymnasium
Large concert hall reverberation
A domed ballpark
Dome
Cave
Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave
GS Room1
GS Room2
GS Room3
GS Hall1
GS Hall2
Reproduces an indoor-type reverb.
Provides a clear, expansive reverberation.
Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall. Gives
reverberation with a greater sense of depth than GS Room.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Display
Explanation
Reproduces a plate echo (reverberation created using the
vibrations of a metal plate).
GS Plate
GS Delay
A delayed sound that is added to the original, similar to the
reflected sounds of mountain echoes.
No effect is applied when the
slider is moved all the way to
the left. In this case, the
GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned (shifted) laterally.
3.
Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected.
button’s indicator won’t light
up when you press the
Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb, and to the
left for less.
[Ambience/Reverb] button.
You can also move the slider with the dial.
When you press the [Exit] button, the reverb effect is activated, and you return to the
previous screen.
Cancelling the Effect
Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button, and watch the indicator light go
4.
out.
The reverb effect is eliminated.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to
the Sounds You Play (Advanced 3D)
You can add three-dimensional breadth to the sounds you play with automatic
accompaniment (p. 47), or to internal songs or music files. With this effect, called
“Advanced 3D,” you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance.
fig.panel1-4
1.
2.
Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Advanced 3D>.
The following “Advanced 3D screen” appears.
fig.d-adv3d.eps_60
<
> appears in the screen
ON
OFF
when headphones are
connected.
3.
4.
Touch <ON>.
Three-dimensional breadth is added to the sound.
Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part.
When you press the [Exit] button, the Advanced 3D effect is activated, and you
return to the previous screen.
Cancelling the Effect
The Advanced 3D effect is not
applied, even when you touch
<ON>, if all parts are turned
off.
5.
Touch <OFF>.
The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of
the parts.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
❍ Making Detailed Settings for Advanced 3D
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Advanced 3D> to display the Advanced 3D screen.
Press the [Option] button.
fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60
Touch
to switch the screens.
4.
Touch
for the parameter being set to select the value.
Parameter
Display
Explanation
The effect is applied to all tones played with the
keyboard (the lower tone, upper tone, and layer
tone).
All Parts
The effect is applied only to the layer part.
When not using a layer performance (p. 26), the
Part
Layer Parts Advanced 3D effect is not applied to the keyboard
performance, even if <Keyboard> on the Advance
3D screen is set to On.
This selects settings that are adjusted for use with
headphones when headphones are connected.
When no headphones are connected, settings
Auto
adjusted for speakers are selected.
Mode
Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through
speakers are selected.
Speaker
Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through
headphones are selected.
Headphone
Changes the apparent depth of the sound. The
effect is applied more as the value is increased.
Depth
Width
1–4
1–128
Changes the breadth of the sound.
You can also change the value with the dial.
With “Part,” you can touch the icon and then select the value.
5.
When you press the [Exit] button, you return to the Advanced 3D screen.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adding Liveliness to the Sound
(Dynamic Emphasis)
You can add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and distinctness.
fig.panel2-8
1
2
Press the [Sound Control] button, to display the “Sound Control screen.”
The Dynamic Emphasis function is switched on, enlivening the sound.
fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60
Touch the Type icon to select the type.
Indicator
Sharp
Description
Creates a sound with boosted bass and treble.
Produces a sound with chords in the low registers that are
clear and distinct.
Clear
Power
Creates a sound with boosted bass.
Cancelling the Dynamics Emphasis
3
Press the [Sound Control] button once more, and the indicator light goes
out.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the
Preferred Tone Quality (Equalizer)
The KR features a built-in, five-band digital equalizer.
An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches (frequency ranges) to adjust the
sound balance for the overall performance. For example, you can boost the highs to
get a crisper sound, or boost the low end for a more powerful sound.
You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the
performance space.
If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound, you can correct
the distortion with the Master Level slider.
1.
2.
Press the [Sound Control] button, to display the “Sound Control screen.”
Touch <Equalizer>.
The “Equalizer screen” appears.
fig.d-eq.eps_60
3.
Touch the Type icon to make your selection.
Display
Piano
Power
Mild
Explanation
Boosts both the low- and high-frequency ranges.
Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant-sounding tone.
This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling.
This setting boosts the high frequencies for a brilliant, sparkling sound.
All slider values are set to “0.”
Clear
Bright
Flat
User
Store your own preferred settings (p. 35).
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
4.
Touch the slider to make adjustment.
Settings
Displayed
Explanation
Value
Low-frequency range. This is the range of
frequencies for instruments like drums, bass,
organ, guitar and strings.
Low
–
-60–0–+60
-60–0–+60
Mid-low-frequency range. This is the range of
frequencies for lower brass and woodwind
instruments.
Midrange. This is the range of frequencies where
most instrument sounds are concentrated.
Mid
–
-60–0–+60
-60–0–+60
-60–0–+60
Mid-high-frequency range. The ear is most
sensitive to this frequency range.
High-frequency range. These frequencies add
brilliance to the sound.
High
You can temper the distortion in the sound by
lowering the level. Raising the level too much may
cause the sound to become distorted.
Master Level
-60–0–+60
You can also move the slider with the dial.
When you press the [Exit] button, the equalization is placed in effect, and you return
to the previous screen.
Cancelling the Effect
Touch <Flat>.
❍ Storing the Settings
5.
You can store adjusted equalizer settings to <User>.
Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to call up your preferred
settings.
1.
2.
Press the [Sound Control] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Equalizer>.
The “Equalizer screen” appears.
3.
4.
Adjust the equalizer.
Touch <Write>.
The settings are stored.
Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to select the stored settings.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)
You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the
For more on the effect types,
refer to the “Effects List” (p.
178).
keyboard.
1.
2.
First, press the Tone button to select a Tone (p. 23).
The “Tone selection screen” appears.
Then, touch <Effects>.
The “Effects screen” appears.
fig.d-effects.eps_60
Applying Effects to the Sound
3.
Touch <ON>.
The effect selected with <Type> will be applied.
Selecting the Type of Effect
Touch <Type>
Setting the Effect
NOTE
You may find effects not being
applied to certain parts when
different effects are applied to
the upper tone, layer tone, and
lower tone. In such instances,
you can select which effect is
to have priority.
4.
to select the type of effect.
The parameters that can be set change according to the type selected in Step 4.
5.
Touch
for the parameter being set to select the value.
You can also move the slider with the dial.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Tone selection screen.
Cancelling the Effect
On the Effects screen, touch <OFF>.
6.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Adding Effects to Mic Vocals
(Vocal Effect)
For details on connecting a
microphone, refer to
“Connecting a Microphone”
(p. 20).
With a microphone connected, you can add effects to the microphone vocals.
Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as “Vocal Effect.”
❍ How to select Vocal Effect
fig.panel1-5
1.
2.
Press the [Vocal Effects] button.
The “Vocal Effects screen” appears.
fig.d-vocalsfx.eps_60
You can adjust the microphone
volume with the Mic Volume
the KR107.
Touch any one of the icons.
Icon
Explanation
Page
Echo
Adjusts the microphone echo.
Alters the microphone vocals.
Adds harmonies to the original voice.
p. 38
p. 38
p. 39
Transformer
Harmonist
Allows you to start songs and Automatic
Accompaniment using your own tempo.
Vocal Count In
Vocal Keyboard
Music Files
p. 40
p. 41
p. 42
Allows you to produce sounds conforming to the
vocal scale.
You can play a specific part as harmony while
playing back a song.
3.
When you press the [Exit] button, the effect is applied and you return to
the previous screen.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Cancelling the Vocal Effect
4.
Press the [Vocal Effects] button and watch the indicator light go out.
The Vocal Effect function is cancelled.
❍ Adjusting the Echo (Echo)
1.
Touch <Echo> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
fig.d-vo-echo.eps_60
2.
3.
Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal.
Touch the Echo Type <1> or <2> to change the echo type.
Displayed
Explanation
Adds basic reverberations.
Adds reverberations for a karaoke-type echo.
1
2
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen.
❍ Altering Vocals (Transformer)
You can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone. This is called
the “Voice Transformer” function.
1.
Touch <Transformer> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
fig.d-vo-trans.eps_60
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
2.
3.
Touch any one of the icons.
Here’s what the different icons do.
Display
Explanation
Kids
Transforms the input into the sound of a child’s voice.
Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal.
Transforms the input into the sound of a robot’s voice.
Transforms the input into a duck’s quacking sound.
Transforms the input into an alien voice.
Bear
Robot
Duck
Alien
Computer
Female
Male
Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer.
Transforms male voices into female voices.
Transforms female voices into male voices.
Sing through the microphone.
Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected.
Cancelling the Effect
Once again, touch the icon you selected in Step 2.
4.
The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated.
❍ Adding Harmonies (Harmonist)
You can sing with a harmony accompaniment, even when you’re playing solo. This
is called the “Harmonist” function.
1.
Touch <Harmonist> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
Touch
to switch the screen.
fig.d-vo-harmo.eps_60
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
2.
Touch any one of the icons.
Here’s what the different icons do.
Display
Explanation
Unison
Oct-Up
Sounds like two people singing the same melody.
Adds another voice one octave higher than the original.
Adds another voice one octave lower than the original.
Adds harmony a fifth above the original.
Oct-Down
5th Up
3rd Up
Adds harmony a third above the original.
4th Down
Adds harmony a major fourth below the original.
The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony.
The harmony is added to your voice regardless of the pitch.
My Voice
Duo 1
Duo 2
The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
keyboard. Adding harmony to a single voice gives the effect of
two people singing together.
The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony.
pitches are used for female voices, lower pitches for male voices.
Variety
Trio
The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
keyboard. This adds a two-voice harmony that makes it seem that
a trio is singing.
The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
keyboard.
You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody
Intelligence type (p. 60).
Chords
Cancelling the Effect
Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again.
3.
The Harmonist function is cancelled.
❍ Enabling the Start of Songs and Automatic Accompaniment with the
Sound of Your Voice (Vocal Count In)
You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the
microphone.
1.
Touch <Vocal Count In> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
fig.d-vo-coin.eps_60
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
2.
3.
Touch <Arranger> or <Song>.
Display
Explanation
Arranger
Song
Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count.
The song starts at the tempo used for the count.
Count to four (“One, two, three, four”) into the microphone.
Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song
or Music Style.
For example, if you select a time signature of 4/4, then count to four; count to three
when 3/4 time is selected.
The tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you
speak into the microphone, and the song or Arranger begins.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen.
❍ Playing Instrument Sounds at Vocal Pitches (Vocal Keyboard)
You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KR’s internal
Tones.
1.
Touch <Vocal Keyboard> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
fig.d-vo-key.eps_60
2.
3.
If the <OFF> icon is selected, touch the <ON> icon.
Touch any of the icons to select a Tone.
When you play the keys while
using Vocal Keyboard, the
tone selected for Vocal
Keyboard is played.
You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button.
When you sing into the microphone, the sung pitches are played using the selected
Tone.
Cancelling the Effect
4.
Touch <OFF>.
The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
❍ Adding Harmonies to a Specified Part (Music Files)
added based on pitches of the specified part.
1.
2.
Select the song to which you want to add harmony.
To select a song stored in external memory, connect the external memory to the
external memory port.
Touch <Music Files> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
fig.d-vo-music.eps_60
3.
4.
Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony.
When you play back the song and sing into the microphone, harmonies are added
using the pitches of the specified part.
Touch <Variety>.
When <Variety> is ON, the melody played on the keyboard is played as the
harmony. The harmony added is matched to the pitch.
Cancelling the Effect
Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again.
5.
The Music Files function is cancelled.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files
Commercial music files
designed for “karaoke” sing-
along are also available.
Consult your KR dealer when
purchasing music files. Refer
Can Use” (p. 185).
1.
2.
Connect a microphone.
Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied.
On the KR, use the Vocal Effect function to adjust the echo (p. 38).
Harmonist function (p. 39).
3.
Select a song.
To select a song stored in external memory, connect the external memory to the
external memory port. For instructions on how to select songs, refer to “Playing a
Song” (p. 65).
On the KR, lyrics can also be
Refer to “Connecting an
External Display” (p. 156) and
“Changing the Settings for
Showing Images with the
Television (External Display)”
(p. 158).
4.
5.
Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons.
If necessary, change the key of the song (Transpose: p. 88).
When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the accompaniment starts playing.
Sing along with the accompaniment.
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
6.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop the accompaniment.
You can stop lyrics from being
displayed. Refer to “Hiding
the Lyrics (Lyrics)” (p. 154).
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Using the Metronome
The KR features a built-in metronome. During playback of the song and
accompaniment, the metronome plays at that tempo and beat.
fig.panel1-6
■ Using the Metronome
1.
Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.
You will hear the metronome.
The following “Metronome screen” appears.
fig.d-metro.eps_60
You can press the [Exit] button to have the metronome continue to play while you
return to the previous screen.
Stopping the Metronome
2.
Press the [Metronome] button once more, and the indicator light goes
out.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
■ Changing the Metronome Settings
❍ Adjusting the Tempo
You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo and beat of the metronome
changes automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song.
1.
Press the Tempo [-] or [+] buttons to adjust a tempo.
You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of
= 10–500.
Pressing the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected song
accompaniment to the basic tempo.
❍ Changing the Beat of the Metronome
1.
2.
On the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>.
Select the beat with the dial.
When
is selected,
only the upbeat will sound.
❍ Changing the Volume
The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels.
1.
2.
On the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>.
Select the volume with the dial.
Choosing
sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing
sets
it to the highest level.
Choose
to silence the metronome sound.
❍ Changing the Type of Sound
You can change the sound the metronome makes.
The setting is at “Normal metronome sound” when the KR is powered up.
1.
2.
On the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>.
Select the sound with the dial.
Displayed
Explanation
Displayed
Explanation
Normal metronome
sound
Electronic metronome
sound
“1, 2, 3” in Japanese
“1, 2, 3” in English
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Performance
Displayed
Explanation
Displayed
Explanation
Wood block
Dog and cat sounds
Triangle and castanet
Hand clap
❍ Changing How the Metronome Beat (Pattern) Sounds
You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals.
1.
2.
On the Metronome screen, touch <Pattern>.
Select the pattern with the dial.
Displayed
Explanation
Usual sound
Displayed
Explanation
Dotted half-note intervals
Dotted quarter-note
intervals
Half-note intervals
Dotted eighth-note
intervals
Quarter-note intervals
Eighth-note intervals
Single back beat added
Shuffle rhythm added
Sixteenth-note intervals
Triplet rhythm added
❍ Turning Off the Beat Light (Beat Indicator)
The beat light flashes in time with the metronome, accompaniment Styles, and song
tempos, but you can set it so that it stays off at all times.
1.
2.
Touch <Beat LED> in the Metronome screen.
Select ON/OFF (Beat Indicator off) with the dial.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment
What is Automatic Accompaniment?
For instructions on playing the
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button for Automatic Accompaniment’s
optimum settings. Automatic Accompaniment is a function that provides you with
accompaniment in a variety of musical genres, just by specifying chords in the left
hand. Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra, even when
performing alone!
Automatic Accompaniment,
refer to “Selecting Music Styles
(Music Style Buttons)” (p. 51).
What Are Music Styles?
Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called “Music Styles.”
There are many different kinds of music around the world, and each has its own
unique features. What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a
unique combination of elements like instrumentation, melody, and phrasing, which
interact to create the musical character.
Elements of Music Styles
A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called “divisions.”
Division
Intro
Explanation
Played at the start of a song.
Original
The basic accompaniment pattern.
Variation
This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the
mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original.
Fill In To Original
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the
mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the
variation.
Fill In To
Variation
Ending
The conclusion of a song.
In addition, the accompaniment Styles are composed of up to a maximum of eight
performance parts: “Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment 2,”
“Accompaniment 3,” “Accompaniment 4,” “Accompaniment 5,” and
“Accompaniment 6.”
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment
(One-Touch Arranger)
Here’s how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment.
fig.panel2-1
1.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The Basic screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
<
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 31).
Music Style, the tempo and
tone change to selections that
go well with the selected
Music Style. If you do not want
to change the tempo and tone,
refer to “Changing Music
Setting)” (p. 139).
Observe the settings:
• The keyboard is split into left- and right-hand parts, with accompaniment
chords specified for the left-hand side of the keyboard.
• A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen.
• The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set.
2.
3.
Play a chord on the Lower-part of keyboard.
For instructions on selecting
Music Styles, refer to
The accompaniment begins, starting from the intro.
Play chords with the left hand, and the melody with the right.
Style Buttons)” (p. 51).
When you change chords in the left hand, the accompaniment also changes.
fig.arr-split.e
Split Point (
)
F
3
For instructions on starting
and stopping the
Accompaniment” (p. 55).
The range specifyed a chord
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
You can change the range in
which chords are played.
Please refer to “Changing the
Keyboard’s Split Point (Split
Point)” (p. 139).
After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ About Chords
A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously. Chords are
indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord (the root) and the chord
type, which is determined by the other notes of the chord.
For example, the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note “C” and the chord
type “m” (minor). C m is made up of the three notes “C,” “E ” and “G.”
“C m” is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen.
fig.chord.e
Cm
E
Chord Type
Root Note
C
G
Root Note
All chord roots are indicated as a letter, sometimes with
correspond to the notes shown below.
or
added, and
fig.chord-root.e
settings that are not used. You
can also change the rules
■ Playing Chords with Simple Fingering
(Chord Intelligence)
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the
moment you play a key.
governing how chords are
played. For more information,
see “Changing How Chords
Are Played and Specified
To play a “C” chord, for example, you normally have to play the three keys C, E, and
G. But with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C key to start a “C” chord
accompaniment.
(Arranger Config)” (p. 139).
fig.chord-intel.e
• Intelligence 1
Major
Minor
Ex: C m
Ex:
C
Play the root and
the third key above it.
Play the chord root.
For more information about
chord fingering, refer to the
“Chord List” (p. 180).
Seventh
Ex: C 7
Minor Seventh
Ex: C m7
Play the root and
the second key below it.
Play the root,
the third key above it, and
the second key below it.
Major Seventh
Ex: C maj 7
Diminished
Ex:
C dim
Play the root and
the first key below it.
Play the root and
the sixth key above it.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder)
Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can display the notes
of the chord on the screen.
1.
On the Basic screen, touch <
>.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
2.
Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about.
The chord fingering appears on screen.
fig.d-crdfind.eps_60
For example, if you wanted to see the fingering for a C# chord, you would touch
<C>, then touch <#>.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Basic screen.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons)
You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons.
Four different preset styles are assigned to the Music Style.
fig.panel2-2
1.
2.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
For more on the Music Style
names, refer to the “Music
Style List” (p. 179).
Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group.
Watch the indicator button light up.
Five of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen.
fig.d-stylesel.eps_60
This screen is called the “Style Selection screen.”
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other styles.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
You can touch <Search> to find Styles that match the selected criteria (p. 52).
3.
4.
You can use the dial to automatically switch pages and select Styles.
Touch Preset <A>, <B>, <C>, or <D> in the lower part of the screen.
When the Music Style is selected, Preset A is selected.
When any of the Presets from <A> through <D> are selected, the Music Style tempo,
Upper Tone, Style Orchestrator settings (p. 59) and other settings change.
5.
Press the [Exit] button.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
When you play a chord in the left-hand part of the keyboard, the selected Music Style
is automatic.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles
(Style Search)
You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or
other criteria you set.
Only the KR’s internal Music
Styles are searchable.
You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names.
1.
2.
Press one of the Music Style buttons.
Touch <Search>.
The following “Style Search screen” appears.
fig.d-stylsrch1.eps_60
Condition Search screen
Name Search screen
Touch here to switch these screens.
In a condition search, the KR
looks for Music Styles
satisfying all of the selected
search criteria.
❍ Searching by Conditions
3.
4.
Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the dial to select the search
conditions.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style Search screen.
❍ Searching by Music Style Name
3.
4.
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.
Decide which character you’ll use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear on the display.
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous
screen.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Selecting Music Styles on External Memories
You can play other User Styles saved to external memories (sold separately) or User
memory (p. 135).
fig.panel2-3
1.
Press the Music Style [User] button.
fig.d-styldisk.eps_60
2.
3.
Touch <User> in the lower left of the screen.
When you touch <User> on the lower part of the screen, the screen for selecting user
memory or external memory Styles appears.
Touching <Preset> in the lower left of this screen returns you to the screen for
selecting the “Trad/World” accompaniment Styles.
Touch <
> <
> to select the storage media to which the
accompaniment Style is saved.
The names of the accompaniment styles stored on the selected storage media are
displayed.
4.
5.
Select a Music Style, and touch the Music Style name.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
You can save multiple user
Styles to user memory. Take a
look at “Saving a User Style”
(p. 135).
You can now perform in the selected Music Style.
Music Styles selected from external memories are stored until the power is turned
off. Even after ejecting the external memory, by pressing the Music Style [User]
button, you can perform using the most recently selected Music Style.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns
You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles.
fig.panel2-4
NOTE
1.
2.
Select a Music Style (p. 51).
Some Music Styles do not
include rhythm patterns.
When you select these Style
patterns, no rhythm patterns
are played, even when you
play on the left side of the
keyboard.
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played.
3.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins, starting from the Intro.
Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment, you can add intros and endings by
pressing the [Intro/Ending] button, and make changes to the rhythm patterns with
the Fill In button (p. 58).
Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo
fig.panel2-5
When the Basic screen is displayed, you can use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons or the dial
to change the tempo.
The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
Pressing the Tempo [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style
or song to the basic tempo.
You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the
accompaniment is playing.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment
Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for the
accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on
the lower section of the keyboard), and automatically sets an appropriate intro for
the accompaniment. You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and
stops.
fig.panel2-6
■ Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously
When You Play the Keyboard (Sync Start)
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,
causing the indicators of both buttons to flash.
The Sync Start settings go into effect.
Sync Start is set immediately
after the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button is pressed.
2.
Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
As you play the keys, the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously.
❍ Changing the Intro
When set for Sync Start (the indicators of both the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/
Stop] button are flashing), you can use the following procedure to change the intro,
or prevent the intro from playing.
Starting without an Intro
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and watch the indicator go out.
Now when you play a chord with the keyboard, the accompaniment starts without
the intro.
To Start with a Short Intro Added
Touch <Arranger> in the Basic screen to open the arranger screen.
Touch the Intro <2>.
fig.d-intro2.eps_60
Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard, a short intro is played, and the
accompaniment starts.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
❍ Starting at the Press of a Button
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,
and the indicators lights go out.
The Sync Start function is cancelled.
2.
3.
Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard.
Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button.
When you press the [Intro/Ending] button, the intro plays, and the accompaniment
starts. When you press the [Start/Stop] button, the accompaniment starts without
the intro.
When you touch Intro <2> on the Basic screen, a short intro plays.
You can change the sound of
the chord tone and bass tone.
Take a look at “Changing How
Chords Are Played and
Specified (Arranger Config)”
(p. 139).
Chord Tones and Bass Tones
When you play the keys in the left-hand side of the keyboard while the [Start/Stop]
button’s indicator is not lit, chords play. This note is called the “Chord Tone,” and
the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the “Bass Tone.”
■ Stopping Automatic Accompaniment
❍ Stopping with an Added Ending
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops.
❍ Stopping at the Same Time the Button is Pressed
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the
Intro (Countdown)
If an intro plays before your performance, you can have a count-in sound played to
the end of the intro, helping you hear when to start playing.
fig.countdown.e
When the Intro has finished playing,
the accompaniment plays.
Ex: 4/4
Intro
1
2
3
4
Count Sound
1.
2.
Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Countdown settings screen” appears.
fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60
When set to “Count In/
Down,” a count sound is
song begins.
Touch <Count Mode>
In/Down.”
to set this to “Count Down” or “Count
When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button, the performance starts,
and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro.
For more about settings on the
Countdown screen, refer to
“Changing the Settings for the
Count” (p. 141).
❍ Cancelling the Countdown
Press the [Count/Marker] button and the indicator light goes out.
3.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Modifying an Accompaniment
You can add variation to the
assigning different functions to
the Performance Pads and
pedals. For more information,
see “Assigning Functions to
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User
When you use Automatic Accompaniment, you can easily add Fill Ins to the
accompaniment patterns, change arrangements, and make other changes.
■ Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
(Fill In Buttons)
There are two accompaniment patterns: the Original, and a Variation. In addition, a
fill-in (or short phrase) is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns
change, which adds more interest to the song. It can be effective to use the simpler
original pattern for the first half of the song, and the variation pattern for the second
half.
Functions)” (p. 144).
What’s a “Fill In”?
A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a “Fill In.”
The KR automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style.
fig.panel2-7
Press the Fill In [To Variation] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played.
Press the Fill In [To Original] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played.
Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in at the
appropriate place and time.
Adding a Fill-in without Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
You can play only the fill-in, without changing the accompaniment pattern.
Press the lit [To Original] or [To Variation] Fill In button during the performance.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
■ Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen
You can change accompaniment patterns in intros, fill-ins, endings, and so on by
touching the screen. This lets you enjoy even more advanced performances.
1.
2.
Press the One Touch [Arranger] button.
The Arranger basic screen is displayed.
Touch <Arranger>.
The following screen appears.
fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60
For more information about
leading bass, refer to p. 145.
Touch the screen to change the accompaniment pattern.
■ Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles
(Style Orchestrator)
You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment. This function is called “Style
Orchestrator.” Each Music Style has three different accompaniment arrangements.
fig.panel2-8
1.
2.
Press the [Style Orchestrator] button and watch the indicator light up.
When you press the [User
Function] buttons, the [Style
Orchestrator] button’s
The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads.
Press Performance Pad [1]–[3] to change the arrangement for the
accompaniment.
indicator goes out, and the
function of the Performance
Pads changes. For details refer
to p. 81 and p. 144.
Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up.
Button
1 (Basic)
Explanation
This is the simplest arrangement.
This is a more involved arrangement.
This is the most elavorate arrangement.
When simple Music Styles are
selected, there may be no
change in the arrangement
even when you use the Style
Orchestrator function.
2 (Advanced)
3 (Full)
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand
Part (Melody Intelligence)
You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard.
While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, the matching harmony is
automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand. This function
is called “Melody Intelligence.”
fig.panel2-10
1.
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button and watch the indicator light up.
When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, harmony is
added.
The following “Melody Intelligence screen” appears.
fig.d-melointel.eps_60
2.
3.
Select and touch a harmony type.
Then when you play a melody on the keyboard, a harmony style is automatically
added.
With some harmonies, Tones
may change automatically.
Also, when you play several
keys at the same time, in some
cases harmony may be added
to one note.
When you press the [Exit] button, you’re returned to the previous screen, while the
Melody Intelligence function remains selected.
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button once more and the indicator light
goes out.
The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a
Performance (Lower Tone)
Normally, when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance, sounds are not
produced by playing the left-hand part of the keyboard. When you touch the
<Lower 1> or <Lower 2> icon, you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard
play simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment.
1.
2.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
This sets the Automatic Accompaniment.
On the Basic screen, touch <Lower 1>.
Now when you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play will
sound, and the accompaniment chord changes.
In the same manner, you can play the lower tone by touching <Lower 2>.
By touching both <Lower 1> and <Lower 2>, you can get a Layer performance for
the left-hand.
fig.d-lower.eps_60
Stopping the Sound in the Left-hand
3.
Touch <Lower 1>.
The <Lower 1> icon returns to the original color.
To have <Lower 2> play as well, also touch <Lower 2>.
The lower Tones stop playing.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added
(Piano Style Arranger)
Usually with Automatic Accompaniment, you play chords on the left-hand side of
the keyboard and the melody on the right-hand side. Chords can also be recognized
over the entire keyboard, allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment
without splitting the keyboard. This function is called “Piano Style Arranger.”
This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song
by playing chords in the ordinary way, without giving any thought to the location
of a keyboard split.
1.
2.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
Touch <Split> to turn the Split function off.
fig.d-pianist.eps_60
3.
4.
Select a Music Style (p. 51).
Play the keyboard.
The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each
Part (Balance)
You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard,
and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style.
■ Changing the Volume Balance Between the
NOTE
Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob)
When this knob is turned
completely to the
You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the
Accompaniment side, no
sounds from the keyboard are
audible, even when the keys
are pressed. You can usually
leave the knob at the center
position.
notes you play on the keyboard.
1.
Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob.
fig.volbal.e
■ Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each
Performance Part (Part Balance)
You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style, and the
balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard.
fig.panel2-11
1.
Press the [Part Balance] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Part Balance screen” appears.
Touch
to switch the screens.
fig.d-partbal2.eps_60
Switch the screens
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
The volume balance between the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated.
Display
Rhythm
Performance part
Music Style Rhythm Part
Bass
Music Style Bass Part
Accompaniment 1–6
Accomp1
Accomp2
Accomp3
Accomp4
Accomp5
Accomp6
Chord Tone
Bass Tone
Audio
Chord Tone (p. 56)
Bass Tone (p. 56)
Audio
When you touch <Keyboard>, a screen like the following appears.
fig.d-partbal1.eps_60
Switch the screens
This shows the volume balance between the keyboard’s Tones when either layer
performance (p. 26) or split performance (p. 27) are used, or the volume balance
when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects (p. 24).
Displayed
Drum/SFX
Upper
Tone Part
Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys
Upper Tone
Lower Tone 1
Lower Tone 2
Layer Tone 1
Layer Tone 2
Lower 1
Lower 2
Layer 1
Layer 2
When you touch <Accomp>, you return to the screen for setting the accompaniment
Style volume balance.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Playing a Song
Now, let’s try practicing while playing back internal songs, commercial music files,
and songs saved to external memories.
You can use rewind or fast-forward to go to any desired measure, and play back
from that point.
You can also play audio files.
fig.panel3-1
Record/Playback buttons
Selecting the Song
When playing back songs on optional external memory, first connect the external
memory to the external memory port.
1.
Press the [Song] button.
The following “Song Selection screen” appears.
fig.d-songsel.eps_60
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other songs.
About Random Performances
When “Favorites” is selected as
the genre, songs registered in
“Favorites” are played back in
random order.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
: The fingering is included in the notation.
: The chords are indicated in the notation.
: You can display song lyrics.
When “External Memory” is
selected as the genre, the songs
in the folder appearing on the
screen are played back in
random order.
: For audio files.
When you touch <
>, songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in
>, all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played
random order.
When you touch <
in order, starting from the selected song. When the last song is finished, playback
resumes from the first song in the genre.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
<
>: The selected song is played back. This changes to <
is played back; playback stops when you touch <
> while the song
>.
If there is recorded song data,
the “Delete song” screen
appears.
By touching <File>, you can then view information about the song (p. 154) and save
songs to external memory (p. 102).
2.
3.
Touch <
><
> to select the song genre.
If it’s okay to delete the song,
touch <OK>. If you do not
want to delete the song, touch
<Cancel>, and either save the
song to a external memory (p.
102) or register the song to the
Favorites (p. 69).
Touch the name of the song to be played back.
You use and the dial to select songs.
Playing back
Press the [
4.
(Play/Stop)] button.
The button indicator lights up, and playback of the song begins.
Stopping the Song
Press the [
5.
(Play/Stop)] button once again.
The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops.
When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.
Press the [
(Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song.
NOTE
When you select a song, the
measure number in the Basic
screen is highlighted. The
performance data is being
loaded while the indication is
highlighted; please wait a few
moments for this to be
Record/Playback Buttons
fig.composer.e
completed.
Track buttons (Rhythm, Whole, Bass/Accomp, Lower, Upper):
Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button. Use these
buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played. For more detailed
information, refer to p. 84.
[
(Reset)] button: Returns to the beginning of the song.
[
(Play/Stop)] button:
Plays back the song, or if the song is currently being played, it stops the song.
NOTE
[
[
(Rec)] button: Records the performance. For more detailed information, refer to p. 90.
When using markers to specify
a section to be repeated (p. 87),
you can rewind and fast
forward only within the range
between Marker A and
Marker B.
(Bwd)] button: Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time
the button is pressed. Moves back the playback position of the song one second each when an
audio file is being played back. When held down, the song “rewinds” continuously.
[
(Fwd)] button: Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the
button is pressed. Advances the playback position of the song one second each when an audio
file is being played back. When held down, the song is forwarded continuously.
Holding down the [
(Play/Stop)] button and pressing the [
(Fwd)] button moves
you to the end of the song.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
When Selecting Songs in Folders
1. Touch the folder name.
2. Touch <
(Play)> at the bottom left of the screen.
After a moment, a list of songs in the folder is displayed.
You can also select the folder using the dial or the [ (Bwd)] or [
button on the remote; the folder can then be opened by pressing the
(PLAY)] button.
NOTE
(Fwd)]
If a folder contains 500 or more
files and/or folders, some of
the files and folders may not
be displayed.
[
3. Touch a song from the list that appears to select the song you want to
play back.
* Depending on the number of songs contained in a folder, this may take some time.
About Audio Files
Audio files in the following format can be played back:
• “.WAV” extension
• 16bit linear
• Sampling rate of “44.1 kHz”
• Stereo
You cannot use the following functions in playing back audio files.
• Marker (p. 85)
• Displaying notations (p. 74)
• Registering “Favorites” (p. 69)
• Transposing (p. 88)
• Changing tempos (p. 81)
• Track Mute (p. 84)
• Recording (p. 91)
• Search (p. 68)
* Saving or performing other procedures during playback of audio files may
cause the song to stop while it is playing.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
■ Using Keywords to Search for Songs (Song Search)
You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo
or genre.
Only the KR’s internal songs
are searchable.
You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name.
1.
2.
Press the [Song] button.
Touch <
>.
The following “Song Search screen” appears.
fig.d-songsrch1.eps_60
Condition Search screen
Name Search screen
Touch here to switch these screens.
❍ Searching by Conditions
3.
Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the dial to select the search
conditions.
With <Data>, songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs.
You can use four different criteria in searches: “Chords,” “Lyrics,” “Finger” (fingering
numbers), and “Any.” By selecting a song containing any of this data, then displaying
it in the KR’s notation, you can display information about the selected data.
4.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the song name to select the song.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song Selection screen.
❍ Searching by Song Name
3.
4.
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.
Decide which character you will use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the song name to select the song.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the previous screen.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)
You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to “Favorites,”
allowing you to select these songs easily.
Selecting the Song
You can also register songs on
external memory to the
Favorites. For details, refer to
“Copying Songs on External
Memories to Favorites” (p.
106).
1.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song Selection screen appears (p. 65).
fig.d-songsel.eps_60
2.
Touch the song name to select the song to be registered.
Registering to Favorites
3.
Touch <Favorites>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-fvrtadd.eps_60
NOTE
You cannot register audio files
to the Favorites.
4.
Touch <OK>.
The selected song is registered to Favorites.
Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the
Song Selection screen.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
■ Removing Songs From Favorites
This deletes registered songs for Favorites.
1.
Touch <
> <
> in the Song Selection screen to select the
“Favorites” from the genre category.
fig.d-song-fvrt.eps_60
2.
3.
Touch the name of the song to be deleted.
Touch <Delete>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-fvrtdel.eps_60
4.
Touch <OK>.
The song is deleted.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Using the Remote Control
Refer to “Installing Batteries in
You can use the included remote control to easily start and stop performances and
switch songs.
the Remote Control” (p. 18).
■ How to Use the Remote Control
When using the remote control, aim the remote control at the infrared receiver,
keeping in mind the range of operation (below).
Infrared Receiver
Range of operation
Distance:
4 m (approximately 13 feet)
Angle:
40 degrees to the left and right
of the receiver.
Remote Control
Information from the remote is
not received when Remote
Sensor setting is switched off.
Refer to “Switching the
Remote Sensor On and Off (iR
function)” (p. 150).
Precautions Concerning Use of the Remote Control
• The remote control is able to transmit only one operation at a time.
• The remote control may not operate even within the range of operation if there
is an obstacle between it and the main unit.
• Using the remote control near other equipment that uses remote control systems
may result in operational errors.
• The life of the battery depends on the amount and conditions of use. If the
operational range of the remote control decreases, change the batteries.
• If you will not be using the remote control for a long period of time, remove the
batteries.
• The remote’s response may suffer if the remote’s sensor is situated under
spotlights or exposed to other such strong lighting.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
■ About the Remote Control
Infrared Emitter
Restoring the Original
“TONE,” “HARMONY,”
and “TRANSFORM”
Settings
Adding Effects to Mic
Vocals
6
1
Selecting the Tone for
the Left-Hand and
Right-Hand Tracks
7
8
Turning the Advanced
2
3D Function On and
Off
Switching the Screen of
the External Display
Selecting the Song
Genre
3
Starting and Stopping
Songs,
Selecting Previous and
Following Songs
9
Changing the Volume
10
11
Muting the Sound
4
5
Changing the Tempo of
the Song and Automatic
Accompaniment
Using the Function
Assigned to the
Buttons
Transposing Sounds
from the Keyboard and
Songs Being Played
Back
12
You can also switch the functions for the [
] (Play/Stop) button, the [FUNC 1]
[FUNC 2] button, the TEMPO [-] [+] button, and the TRANSPOSE [-] [+] button.
Please refer to “Changing the Functions of the Remote Control’s Buttons” (p. 149).
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Song Playback
Button
Explanation
This changes the vocals from the mic. The setting switches each time you press the
button, cycling through male, female, Kids, and normal voice settings.
TRANSFORM
1
This adds harmonies to the mic vocals.
HARMONY
The harmony setting switches each time you press the button, cycling through
Music Files (p. 42), Oct-Up (p. 39), Oct-Down (p. 39), and normal voice settings.
This adds greater breadth to the sound. Pressing this button toggles the Advanced
3D effect on and off.
2
3
3D
INTERNAL
This switches the genres of the internal songs.
Selects songs in the “Favorites.”
FAVORITES
When you press the button with external memory or a disk connected, the
connected storage media is selected.
EXTERNAL
MUTE
4
5
This mutes all of the sounds.
You can use the function assigned to this button. You can also change the function
assigned to the button (p. 149).
FUNC1, FUNC2
The settings for the [TONE] button, [HARMONY] button, and [TRANSFORM]
button are restored to their original values.
The left and right tracks switch to a piano tone.
6
7
CANCEL
TONE
Pressing the button successively cycles you through these tone selections: Left
track, Right track, then User track.
Each press of the button takes you to the next selection among the available choices,
which are, in order: panel, notations, notations+keyboard, lyrics.
You can press the [DISPLAY] button while the Tempo screen or Volume screen is
displayed to clear the Tempo screen or Volume screen.
8
DISPLAY
* Some songs may not feature screens with lyrics.
Pressing the [
Pressing the [
] button at the beginning of the song selects the previous song.
] button at a point other than the beginning of the song returns
you to the beginning of the song.
This starts and stops playback of the song.
9
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 149).
] button.
When you press the [
] button, the next song is selected.
VOL - +
(Volume)
10
11
12
You can adjust the volume.
This adjusts the tempo.
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 149).
TEMPO - +
This transposing sounds from the keyboard and songs being played back.
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 149).
TRANSPOSE - +
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
With the KR107, you can enjoy practice using a variety of functions.
Displaying the Notation
Using “Visual Lesson,” you
can select practice songs suited
to your skill level.
Additionally, you can have
the results your
The KR can display notations not only for the internal songs, but for music files and
performances recorded with the KR. This is very convenient for performing while
reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded. When you play
performance indicated in
points and check the
content in the notation.
Refer to the Quick Start.
Selecting the song
When playing back songs on external memories, first connect the external memory
to the external memory port.
1.
2.
Press the [Song] button to select a song.
In some internal songs, the
fingering is displayed.
For details refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 65).
The fingering numbers shown
in the screen indicate one
possible fingering.
Press the [DigiScore] button.
The “Notation screen” appears.
fig.d-notation.eps_60
Chord names can be displayed
in some of the internal songs
and recorded performances
using the KR’s Chord
Sequencer (p. 121).
You can make more advanced
settings for the notation by
pressing the [Option] button.
3.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Playback of the song begins, and the notation advances along with the progression
of the performance.
NOTE
No notes are shown in the
notation if the selected part
contains no data. To change
the part being displayed, refer
to “Making Detailed Settings
for the Notation Display” (p.
76).
Notes Regarding the Notation Display
• Since the displayed notation data is read from external memory or the internal
memory, some time may be required for the notation to be displayed.
• The displayed notations are based on music files. Priority is placed on the
readability of the displayed music, not on the accurate rendition of difficult,
high-level performances. Thus, there may be discrepancies seen when compared
with commercially available printed music. The display is not intended for
viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed notations, or complex
songs.
NOTE
• On the notation display screen, lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range
displayed on the screen and may not be visible.
You can not display the
notation for audio files.
• Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the notation or
change the displayed part during playback of the song.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
■ Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds
(Touch the Notes)
In the Notation screen, you can have notes played by touching the notes on the
screen.
When you display the keyboard in the screen (p. 77), the keys on the keyboard for
the notes you touch are then shown in the display. This allows you confirm notes by
sight, sound, and touch.
In addition, when you trace part of the notation with your finger, the traced segment
is played back. This allows you to easily play back phrases you like.
fig.d-notation-key.eps_60
■ Scrolling the Notation Along with the
Performances (AutoSync DigiScore)
You can have the notation displayed in the screen scroll automatically as you play,
even when the song is not being played back. No more frantically trying to turn to
the next page in the notation while you are performing.
This also lets you play difficult passages more slowly and otherwise practice at your
own pace.
* Auto Sync DigiScore is linked to the performance of the part shown in the screen. The
notation does not scroll if you are playing a part that is not currently displayed.
When the Bouncing Ball is Blue
Start playing at the point where the ball is bouncing.
You can change the AutoSync
DigiScore settings. Refer to p.
77.
The bouncing ball follows along and the notation scrolls as you play.
When the Bouncing Ball is Red.
If nothing is played for a short while, the bouncing ball turns red. At this time, if you
play a phrase near the position of the bouncing ball, the ball automatically moves to
the point in the notation where you are playing.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
When you play four or more notes while the bouncing ball is red, the ball moves to
the point where you are playing.
When you play fewer than four notes, the bouncing ball does not jump to the new
position, and the notation does not scroll.
Under certain conditions, the
bouncing ball may not move as
expected.
The bouncing ball will move within the range of the notation displayed on the
external display or television. If you start playing at a point that is not currently
shown in the external display or television, the bouncing ball does not jump to the
new position, and the notation does not scroll.
■ Making Detailed Settings for the Notation
Display
You can change the part appearing on the notation display and change the manner
in which the notation is displayed.
NOTE
You can change the parts to be
displayed when you touch
each of the icons.
1.
2.
Press the [DigiScore] button to display the Notation screen.
Press the [Option] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-notationopt.eps_60
In some internal songs, the
fingering is displayed.
The fingering numbers shown
in the screen indicate one
possible fingering.
Switch the screens
You can select the parts to be displayed in the notation by touching the four icons at
the lower left of the screen.
Icon
Description
The upper part and lower part are displayed.
The upper part is displayed.
The lower part is displayed.
The User part is displayed.
Chord names can be displayed
in some of the internal songs
and recorded performances
using the KR’s Chord
Sequencer (p. 122).
You can also touch <Export> to save the notation as an image file (p. 79).
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
3.
Touch
for the parameter being set to select the value.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Notation screen.
Item
Setting
Displays an enlarged notation.
Zoom
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Sets whether or not the
enlarged notation is
displayed.
Displays the notation at the normal size.
Displayed.
Keyboard
Sets whether the
keyboard is displayed
beneath the notation.
Not displayed.
The notation screen does not scroll
automatically.
OFF
The notation screen scrolls
automatically. When the bouncing ball
is blue, playback begins from the point
in the notation where the ball is set.
When the bouncing ball is red, and you
start playing a phrase at a point in the
notation close to where the ball is
located, the ball moves to the point
where you are playing. This position is
determined after you play at least four
notes of the phrase.
AutoSync DigiScore
Sets the function
whereby the notation
screen scrolls
automatically as you
play, even if the song is
not played back.
JUMP
The notation screen scrolls
automatically from the current position
in the song as you play.
NEXT
NOTE
Lyrics
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
The lyrics are displayed.
This setting determines
whether or not lyrics in
songs that contain lyrics
data appear in the
notation.
Not displayed.
Finger Numbers
This setting determines
whether or not the
fingering in songs that
contain fingering data
appears in the notation.
The fingering is displayed.
Not displayed.
Chords
The chord names are displayed.
Not displayed.
This setting determines
whether or not chord
names in songs that
contain chord data
appears in the notation.
OFF
Not displayed.
Pitches
C, D, E
The pitch names (C, D, E) are displayed.
Sets whether or not the
note names appear in the
music when the notation
is expanded.
Do, Re, Mi
(Fixed)
The pitch names (fixed Do) are
displayed.
Do, Re, Mi
(Movable)
The syllable names (movable Do) are
displayed.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Item
Setting
BASIC
Controls each of the pedal movements.
You can start and stop playback of song
data with the left pedal. Pressing the
pedal in rapid succession moves you
back in the song the number of
measures equal to the number of times
you press the pedal, after which
REPLAY
playback resumes. This allows you to
use the pedal to rewind quickly, a useful
feature when, for example, you want to
repeatedly listen to a difficult phrase.
Pedal
Sets the pedal function.
Scrolls the notation in the KR-107’s
display.
Pressing the center pedal scrolls to the
next page.
Pressing the left pedal scrolls to the
previous page.
PAGE1
PAGE2
Scrolls the notation in the external
display.
Pressing the center pedal scrolls to the
next page.
Pressing the left pedal scrolls to the
previous page.
Notes down to sixteenth notes are
indicated.
Resolution
16th note
Sets the minimum note
length indicated in the
notation.
Notes down to thirty-second notes are
indicated.
32nd note
Auto
Display is switched automatically.
Clef L
Determines whether a
treble or bass clef is
shown in the notation for
the left-hand part.
G (treble) clef is displayed in the
notation.
G Clef
F Clef
Auto
F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation.
Display is switched automatically.
Clef R
Determines whether
treble or bass clef is
shown in the notation for
the right-hand part.
G (treble) clef is displayed in the
notation.
G Clef
F Clef
Auto
F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation.
Key is switched automatically.
Key
Notation is displayed in
the
specified key.
b x 5–0–
# x 6
Notation is displayed in the specified
key.
Item
Setting
User Part
User Track,
Parts 1–16
Selects the part to display when “User” is selected as the part
to be displayed.
Lower Part
Lower Track,
Parts 1–16
Selects the part to display when “Lower” is selected as the
part to be displayed.
Upper Part
Upper Track,
Part 1–16
Selects the part to display when “Upper” is selected as the
part to be displayed.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Item
Setting
Bouncing Ball
ON
Displayed.
This setting determines whether or not the
animated ball is shown bouncing in time with the
song as it is played back.
OFF
Not displayed.
The note is
displayed in color.
Color Notation
This settings determines whether or not the note in
the current position is colored.
ON
OFF
Not displayed.
You can take notations that are displayed on the KR and save them to external
memories. You can also use saved image data to your computer.
NOTE
Other than for your own
personal enjoyment, use of the
notations that are output
without the permission of the
copyright holder is prohibited
by law.
1.
2.
3.
Insert the external memory onto which you want to save the image data
in the KR’s external memory port.
Record the performance (p. 91).
Alternatively, press the [Song] button to select a song.
Press the [DigiScore] button.
The Notation screen appears.
4.
5.
Press the [Option] button.
Touch <Export>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-notationbmp.eps_60
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
6.
Touch the respective parameter and set the range of image data and other
settings with the dial.
Item
Setting
Description
Selects the measure at which output
begins.
Start measure
1, 2–
Selects the measure at which output
ends.
End Measure
Direction
Media
– song end
Portrait,
Landscape
Sets the orientation of the notation
being output.
External Memory,
Disk
Selects the media for the save
destination.
7.
Touch <Execute>.
NOTE
The notation is saved to the external memory as image data in BMP (bitmap) format.
Do not remove the external
memory while “save” is in
progress.
* You cannot save copyrighted song data.
* Other than for your own personal enjoyment, use of the notations that are output without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law.
Saving Your Visual Lesson Performance Results
When you practice with Visual Lesson, the notation showing the model performance
appears in the screen above the notation for your own performance. You can save
these notation in BMP (bitmap) format.
1. While in the “performance results confirmation screen” in Visual
Lesson, press the [Option] button.
2. Touch the parameter whose setting you want to change.
3. Set the value with the dial.
4. Touch <Execute>.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Adjusting the Tempo
This changes the song and Music Style tempos.
If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed, you may find it helpful to first
practice with the tempo slowed down. Then, after becoming more familiar with the
song, you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo.
Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can change the
tempo even when the song is in progress.
fig.panel3-2
Adjusting the Tempo with the Tempo [-] [+] Buttons
Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the
button makes the tempo increase continuously.
NOTE
Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the
button makes the tempo decrease continuously.
You can not adjust the audio
files’ tempo.
Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song
to the basic tempo.
■ Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time
(Tap Tempo)
You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad. This feature is called
“Tap Tempo.” By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the tempo you
are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical terms.
fig.panel3-3
Assigning Functions to the Performance Pads
1.
Press the [User Function] button and watch the indicator light up.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
fig.d-usrfunc.eps_60
Tempo function to the pedal,
and use the pedal to specify
the tempo. For details, refer to
“Assigning Functions to
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User
Functions)” (p. 144).
2.
3.
Touch
for the Performance Pad to which the function is
assigned, then select “Tap Tempo.”
Press the [Exit] button; the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the
screen.
giving the count through the
microphone. For more detailed
information, refer to “Enabling
the Start of Songs and
Specifying the Tempo
Press the Pad to which “Tap Tempo” is assigned at least twice.
4.
The tempo is set to the song you used when tapping the button.
Automatic Accompaniment
with the Sound of Your Voice
(Vocal Count In)” (p. 40).
■ Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute)
If a song has tempo changes, it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo.
Overriding tempo changes is called “Tempo Muting.”
1.
Hold down the [
[+] buttons.
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video.
fig.d-tempmute.eps_60
When you play back the song, it will play at a constant tempo.
Cancel the Tempo Mute Setting
1.
Hold down the [
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
[+] buttons.
Tempo muting is canceled.
Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Match the Tempo Before You Begin
Playing (Count In)
When you’re playing along with a song, you can listen to the tempo before you start
playing by adding a count-in.
This audible count before the song playback is called a “Count In.”
fig.panel3-3
1.
2.
Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Count settings screen” appears.
fig.d-cntin.eps_60
You can have a count sound be
played before the song starts
playing back by holding down
the [
(Reset)] button while
Play/
you press the [
stop] button.The status of the
Count settings won’t be
affected by your use of this
procedure.
Touch <Count Mode>
Down.”
to set this to “Count In” or “Count In/
With this setting, two measures count down before the song playback starts.
Cancelling the Count In
For more about other settings
on the Count settings screen,
refer to “Changing the Settings
for the Count” (p. 141).
1.
Press the [Count/Marker] button so its indicator is turned off.
By pressing [Exit] instead of the [Count/Mark] button, you can close the Count
settings screen without cancelling the count.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Muting Some Parts Before Playing
(Track Buttons)
For more on music files, refer
to “Music Files That the KR
Can Use” (p. 185).
With commercially available music files for piano lessons, the part for each hand can
be played back independently. This makes it easy to practice hands separately. For
example, you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same
right-hand part be played, or you can practice the left-hand part while the right-hand
part plays.
NOTE
You cannot mute individual
parts separately in audio files.
A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below.
fig.trackbuttons.e
Accom-
paniment
Left-hand Right-hand
Drums/SFX
includes more than one
instrument and you want to
mute just one of those
instruments, take a look at
“Modifying the Settings of
Each Part” (p. 115).
By using these Track buttons, you can eliminate the sound of specific parts. This is
referred to as “muting.”
By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion, you can
mute parts the same way. For details, refer to “Recording While Selecting the Track
Buttons (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 96).
When a single Part is not
played, it is called “Minus
One.” Using Minus One, you
can mute out a particular
instrument and play the part
yourself.
1.
Select the song that you wish to play back (p. 65).
Selecting the Part that You’ll be Playing
2.
Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button’s indicator light go
dark.
The sound for the selected part no longer plays.
When playing back SMF files
instruments, and the [3/
button do not correctly control
the lower/ upper
performances, please change
the “Track Assign” settings.
Please refer to “Changing the
Parts Assigned to the Track
Buttons During SMF Playback
(Track Assign)” (p. 155).
For example, when practicing the right hand, press the [4/Upper] button.
When you play back the song, the right-hand performance will not sound. Practice
your right-hand performance along with the left-hand playback.
Playing Back a Song
Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
3.
The song will begin playing back.
The part you selected in step 2 will not sound.
Once again press the button you selected in step 2. The button’s indicator will light
up, and the part will be heard once again.
Even while the song is playing, you can press the track buttons to mute or un-mute
the sound.
Stopping the Song
You can adjust the balance
between the keyboard and
song volume levels. Check out
“Adjusting the Volume
Balance for Each Performance
Part (Part Balance)” (p. 63).
4.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The song will stop.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Setting Markers for Repeated Practice
(Marker)
By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, you can
then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures.
NOTE
■ Placing a Marker within a Song
You cannot place markers in
audio files.
markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of
a section of music. Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same
place as many times as you like. You can add markers or move to a marker even
while playback is in progress.
Access the Marker Screen
First, select the song in which you’ll set the markers (p. 65).
1.
2.
Press the [Count/Marker] button.
Touch <Marker>.
The Marker screen appears.
fig.d-marker.eps_60
Placing Markers
3.
4.
Go to the measure where you want to set a marker using the [
and [ (Fwd)] buttons.
(Bwd)]
Touch <- - -> for Marker A.
Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected.
“- - -” on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the
marker.
Markers can also be assigned
in units of beats rather than
measures. Refer to “Placing a
Marker in the Middle of a
Measure” (p. 141).
5.
In the same way, touch the Marker B <- - -> to set Marker B.
It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
■ Playback from a Marker Location
1.
At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the marker you want
to go to.
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set.
When you play the song, playback starts from the position of the marker.
With the song playing back, playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker
B on the Marker screen.
■ Erasing a Marker
1.
Touch <Clear> for the marker you want to erase.
fig.d-markclear.eps_60
The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <- - ->.
■ Moving a Marker
You can move a marker that has been placed in a song. You can also move the section
of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back, without changing the number
of measures of marked.
1.
On the Marker screen, touch
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
or
for the marker to be moved.
When you touch
When you touch
, the marker is moved to a previous part of the song.
, the marker is moved to a later part of the song.
Moving Markers A and B without Changing the Interval Between Them
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
1.
On the Marker screen, touch
or
in the middle of the screen.
For example, if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure, and
Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure, when you touch in the
middle of the screen, Marker A is moved to the beginning of the first measure, and
Marker B is moved to the beginning of the fifth measure.
Touch
to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B
to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.
fig.markerA-B.e
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
16
16
Measure
Marker A
Measure
Marker B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Marker A
Marker B
■ Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over
You can play back a particular passage over and over. This is convenient when you
want to focus on a passage.
1.
2.
First, set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to
repeat.
For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through
eighth measures over and over. You should place Marker A at the beginning of the
fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar.
Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen.
fig.d-markrpt.eps_60
ON
OFF
When <Repeat> is On
• If neither Marker A nor
Marker B is set, the song
is played back from the
beginning to the end.
• If you only place marker
A, playback repeats
from marker A to the
end of the song.
The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B.
When you play the song, the marked section of music plays back repeatedly.
• If you only place marker
B, playback repeats from
the beginning of the
Cancelling Repeat Playback
song to marker B.
3.
Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen, and the icon returns to the
original color.
Repeat playback is cancelled.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
Transposing Keyboard Sounds and
Songs Played Back (Transpose)
By using the “Transpose function,” you can transpose your performance without
changing the notes you play. For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with
many sharps ( ) or flats ( ), you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to
read and play.
NOTE
You cannot transpose audio
files.
You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key.
When accompanying a vocalist, you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is
comfortable for the singer, while still playing the notes as written (i.e., with the same
fingering positions).
fig.panel3-4
First make sure you have selected the song to be transposed (p. 65).
1.
2.
Press the [Transpose] button.
A “Transpose screen” like the one below appears.
fig.d-transpose.eps_60
Touch the Transpose icon.
Icon
Target
Settings Value
Keyboard sound
-6–0–5
Song to be played back
-24–0–24
-6–0–5
Keyboard sounds, songs being played back
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Practice Functions
3.
Touch the screen keyboard or
value.
,
to select the transposition
Each time you press
When you touch
or
, it transposes the key by a semitone.
, a value of “0” is set.
You can also use the dial to change the transposition value.
When you transpose a song or the keyboard, the [Transpose] button’s indicator
lights up. As you play the keyboard or play back the song, the notes are transposed.
When you press the [Exit] button, the transposition remains in effect, and you’re
returned to the previous screen.
Cancelling Transposition
4.
Press the [Transpose] button and the indicator light goes out.
The transposition value reverts
to “0” when you turn off the
power or select another song.
Transposition is cancelled.
The next time you press the [Transpose] button, illuminating the indicator, the music
is transposed by the value set here.
Example: Playing a song in E major while playing the keys
for C major
In this example, C is the root note in the key of C major. E, the root of E major, is the
third in C major. It is up four keys, including the black keys, so touch
enter “4” for the setting.
, then
fig.trans.e
If you play C E G
It will sound E G# B
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing, or to add
NOTE
additional parts.
Recorded performances are
discarded when another song
is selected, or when the power
is turned off. Be sure to save
important performances on an
external memory. Take a look
at “Saving Songs” (p. 102).
You can use the KR to make the following kinds of recordings.
(New Song)” (p. 91)
• Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment
→ “Recording With Accompaniment” (p. 93)
• Recording along with the internal songs and songs on external memories
→ “Recording Along with a Song” (p. 95)
NOTE
• Re-recording → “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing
Recordings)” (p. 96)
You cannot record while
playing along with audio files.
❍ If the Following Screen Appears
If you’ve recorded a song or changed a song’s settings (see p. 115), the following
message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song.
If it’s okay to delete the song, touch <OK>.
If you do not want to delete the song, touch <Cancel>, and either save the song to an
external memory (p. 102) or register the song to the Favorites (p. 69).
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording a New Song (New Song)
This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or
Automatic Accompaniment.
fig.panel4-1
Settings for Recording Performances
1.
2.
Press One Touch Program [Piano] button.
This sets the KR for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment.
Decide on the tone of the performance (p. 23).
Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.
Recording Settings
3.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
You press the [
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a
song has already been recorded.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
when a song has already been
recorded, the “OK to delete
song?” prompt appears in the
screen. For more detailed
information, refer to “If the
Following Screen Appears” (p.
90).
Touch <New Song>.
This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song.
The KR is put in recording standby.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
4.
Decide on the tempo and beat.
If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.
When you have finished making the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Start Recording
NOTE
been recorded is deleted when
the power to the KR is turned
off. If you do not want a
5.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.
Even without pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you
performance deleted, then
save it to an external memory
or to Favorites. Refer to
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing rather than
pushing the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
When recording starts, the [
light up.
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons’ indicators
“Saving Songs” (p. 102).
Stop Recording
6.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.
Listening to the Recorded Performance
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [
NOTE
7.
(Play/Stop)] button.
When Auto Start is set to ON,
and no action is taken for a
certain period of time after you
have recorded a performance,
a confirmation screen asking
you if you want to delete the
song appears in the display.
If you touch <Yes>, the song is
deleted and the demo song
begins.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances
When you record only a keyboard performance, the performance will be assigned to
the track buttons as follows.
•
•
•
Normal performance (playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard)
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.
If you want to return to the
previous screen and continue
with the recorded
Layer performance
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.
performance, touch <No>.
Split performance
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the
upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button.
•
•
Layer performance and Split performance
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the
upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button.
Drum set or sound effect performance
Recorded on the [R/Rhythm] button.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording With Accompaniment
Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1.
2.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.
Decide on the Music Style.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.
Recording Settings
3.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
You press the [
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a
song has already been recorded.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
when a song has already been
recorded, the “OK to delete
song?” prompt appears in the
screen. For more detailed
information, refer to “If the
Following Screen Appears” (p.
90).
Touch <New Song>.
This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song.
The KR is put in recording standby.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
4.
Decide on the tempo.
Start Recording
5.
Play a chord on the lower part of the keyboard.
You can change how recording
is stopped when recording a
performance with Automatic
Accompaniment. To learn
how, see “Changing How
Recording Stops” (p. 97).
An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts, and recording starts at the same time.
Stop Recording
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
6.
An ending plays, then the Automatic Accompaniment, and recording stop at the
same time.
Listening to the Recorded Performance
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [
7.
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance plays back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances
Music Styles are composed of
eight parts. For details, refer to
“Music Styles and Automatic
Accompaniment” (p. 47).
Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are
assigned to the track buttons as shown below.
Track button
[R/Rhythm]
Performance Recorded
The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is
recorded here. In addition, drum sets and effect sounds
that are selected with the keys in a performance are
recorded to this track.
When using Piano Style accompaniment (p. 62), the
performance played on the keyboard is recorded here.
[1/Whole]
[2/ Bass
Accomp]
The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and
accompaniment part are recorded here.
When the KR is set so that sounds from performances on
the left-hand side of the keyboard are played while the
Automatic Accompaniment sounds (p. 61), your own
performance on the left-hand side of the keyboard is
recorded here.
[3/Lower]
[4/Upper]
Your own performance on the right-hand side of the
keyboard is recorded here.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording Along with a Song
Try recording along with internal songs and songs on external memories.
Here, record your right-hand performance along with the song accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1.
Select a song.
For more on how to select songs, refer to p. 65.
2.
3.
Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance.
Press the [DigiScore] button to display the notation.
For instructions on displaying the notation, refer to p. 74.
The song tempo is stored
within the song you selected.
Recording Settings
4.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
5.
Touch <Add On>.
With this setting, you can record while listening to the selected song.
Selecting the Track to Record
6.
Press the track button for the track that you want to record (i.e., the track
that you want to play yourself).
NOTE
The indicator of the button you pressed will blink, and the KR enters recording-
standby mode.
Only drum sets or SFX set are
recorded to the [R/Rhythm]
button.
Since in this example we will record the upper part performance, press the [4/
Upper] button to make the button’s indicator light blink.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
Start Recording
Press the [
7.
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.
Even without pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing the
keyboard instead of pushing the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
(Play/Stop)] and [ (Rec)] buttons’ indicators light.
When recording starts, the [
Stop Recording
Press the [
8.
(Play/Stop)] button.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording stops.
Listening to the Recorded Performance
9.
Press the [
(Reset)] button, then press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
Recording While Selecting the Track
Buttons (Redoing Recordings)
When you want to re-record, specify the Track button for the performance you want
to re-record, and then record again.
When you want to record over
again after deleting all of the
previous recording, refer to
“Erasing Recorded
When you select a previously recorded Track button and re-record, everything from
the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will
be replaced by the newly re-recorded performance.
Performances” (p. 97).
1.
2.
Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to go to the measure
where you want to begin recording.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
within the song you selected. If
you want to change the tempo
of the recorded song, refer to
“Changing the Tempo of
Recorded Songs” (p. 128) and
“Changing the Tempo Within
the Song” (p. 128).
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
3.
4.
Touch <Add on>.
Press the Track button for the track you want to re-record.
The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking.
The [
(Play/Stop)] button’s indicator flashes, and the KR is put in recording
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
5.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to begin recording.
Rerecording the Accompaniment Part of Automatic Accompaniment
When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, set Sync Start (p.
55), then specify a chord or press the [Start/Stop] button.
6.
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop recording.
If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment, press the
[Intro/Ending] button.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Erasing Recorded Performances
You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance.
1.
Hold down the [Song] button and press the [
(Rec)] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-songdel.eps_60
2.
Touch <OK>.
This deletes the recorded song.
When you touch <Cancel>, the song selection screen or basic screen appears and the
recorded song is not erased.
■ Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks
You can select and erase performances on specific tracks.
1.
Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance
you want to erase, then press the [ (Rec)] button.
The Track button’s light goes dark, and the recorded music is erased.
Changing How Recording Stops
When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, you can change the
accompaniment and the way recording mode stops.
1.
2.
Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.
The Menu screen appears.
Touch <Rec Mode>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-recmode.eps_60
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
3.
Touch <Rec Stop>
“Composer Stop.”
to switch between “Arranger Stop” and
Display
Explanation
Recording stops at the same time the Automatic
Accompaniment stops.
Arranger Stop
Recording does not stop, even when the Automatic
Composer Stop
Accompaniment stops. When you press the [
Stop)] button, recording stops.
(Play/
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups
You can record songs that start with pickup beats (songs that start on a beat other
than the measure’s first beat).
fig.PU.e
Count Sound
~
Measure
-2
PU
1
Recording begins here
Carry out Steps 1–4 on p. 91 to prepare for recording.
If the [ (Rec)] button’s indicator is not lit, press the [
(Rec)] button so the
indicator is lit.
The KR is put in recording standby.
1.
Press the [
(Bwd)] button one time.
The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to “PU,” and the
KR is set to record a song starting with a pickup.
fig.d-pu.eps_60
Start recording. After a one-measure count, recording begins.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Using External Memories
If you install separately available external memory or a floppy disk drive, you’ll be
If connecting an optional
floppy disk drive, substitute
“floppy disk” wherever the
term “external memory”
appears here.
able to save songs you’ve recorded and listen to commercially available music data.
■ Connecting and Ejecting an External Memory
1.
Press the External Memory port cover and open the cover.
Press the cover in; the cover will open.
NOTE
Use external memory available
from Roland. Proper
functioning cannot be
guaranteed if other external
memory products are used.
2.
3.
Connect the external memory to the External Memory port.
Press the cover in again to close the cover.
* Always keep the Ext Memory port cover closed except when connecting and
disconnecting external memory.
Locking the External Memory Port Cover
When connecting external memory (sold separately), you can lock the memory port
cover to prevent theft of the connected external memory.
1.
2.
3.
Connect the external memory to the external memory port.
Press the External Memory port cover to close the cover.
NOTE
Secure the lock using the anti-theft lock screws included with the
instrument.
Take care not to lose the anti-
theft lock screws. Also be sure
to use only the included
screws to secure the anti-theft
lock.
s
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
■ Formatting Media (Format)
NOTE
The process of preparing external memory or disks so that they can be used with the
KR107 is called “initialization” (formatting).
When an external memory is
initialized, all of the data
saved on the external
In certain cases, particularly with floppy disks, the media is formatted for a specific
type of device. If the media format does not match the KR107’s, you will not be able
to use that media with the KR107.
memory is erased. If you’re
formatting a used external
memory for reuse, be sure to
check first to make sure the
external memory doesn’t
contain any data you don’t
want to lose.
fig.panel4-3
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
Connect the external memory to the external memory port.
Press the [Song/File] button.
When initializing floppy disks,
check to make sure that the
disk’s write protect tab is slid
to the “write” position.
Touch <File>.
A “File screen” like the one below appears.
fig.d-songfile.eps_60
NOTE
Do not disconnect the
external memory while data
is being read from or written
to the memory.
NOTE
Do not eject the floppy disk
while data is being read from
or written to the disk. This
may scratch the disk’s
4.
Touch <Format Media>.
magnetic surface, rendering
the memory unusable. (The
disk drive’s indicator lights
brightly while data is being
read from or written to the
disk. At all other times, the
indicator is lit more dimly, or
is not lit at all.)
The following screen appears.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
fig.d-format.eps_60
NOTE
Do not remove the storage
media until the initialization is
completed.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
5.
6.
Touch <Media>
to select the storage media to be initialized.
Touch <Execute>.
A confirmation screen appears. If you want to quit the initialization, touch <Cancel>.
NOTE
If “Error” appears on screen,
take a look at “Error
7.
Touch <OK>.
Initialization of the external memory begins.
Messages” (p. 171).
When initialization is completed, you’re returned to the previous screen.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Saving Songs
Substitute the words “floppy
disk” for “external memory” if
using a separately purchased
floppy disk drive.
another song. Storing recorded performances and other data to external memories
or the Favorites is called “saving.” Be sure to save important songs to external
memories or Favorites.
What are “Favorites?”
You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to
“Favorites,” allowing you to select these songs easily (p. 69).
When you register a song on an external memory to Favorites, you can then play
back the song without connecting the external memory to the external memory
connector.
When using a new strage
media, first initialize (format)
the external memory on the
KR. Take a look at “Formatting
Media (Format)” (p. 100).
If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites, the performance won’t be erased
when the power is turned off.
NOTE
Some commercially available
music files cannot be saved
because they are copy
protected.
Preparations for Saving Data
When saving to external memories, connect the external memory to the external
memory port.
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Song/File] button.
Touch <File>.
When saving to floppy disks,
first check to make sure that
the floppy disk’s protect tab is
set to the “Write” position
(p. 7).
Touch <Save>.
The following “Save Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songsave.eps_60
If not handled with care, a
floppy disk and an external
memory can be damaged, or
the data on it become
corrupted, making playback
impossible. We recommend
saving your songs on two
different media.
When you want to clear all of
the content saved to the
“Favorites” and restore the
settings to the original factory
condition on the KR, refer to
“Formatting the User
Memory” (p. 152).
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Determining the Name of the Song to be Saved
4.
Touch <Rename>.
The following “Rename screen” appears.
fig.d-songname.eps_60
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input, the character appears
at the cursor location. For example touching <ABC> in succession cycles you
through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through “English (upper case),”
“English (lower case),” “numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position.
5.
When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit] button.
Determining the Save Destination
6.
7.
Touch <Media>
to select the save-destination storage media.
Touch <File>
to select the save-destination song number.
If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new
song, the previously saved song will be erased. If you do not want to lose a saved
song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column.
Selecting the Save Setting (when saving to external memories)
8.
9.
Press the [Option] button.
Touch “Tone Compatibility”
format.
to select the tone compatibility
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Some Tones are unique to the KR. Data that is recorded using these tones may not
play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players. When you want
to save data so that it can be played back on another devices, save the data with
“MT” set as the Tone compatibility format.
Display
Explanation
The song is saved as data capable of reproducing
performances with richness of expression using this unit’s
special Tones.
KR
Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland
Digital Pianos or Music Players other than this unit.
You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-
G/R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT
series devices.
MT
<Note>
When data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this
instrument, some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the
data was recorded may be altered.
Even with data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format, an exact
reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS
devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players.
Selecting the File Format (when saving to external memories)
NOTE
Depending on the playback
instrument, some notes may
drop out or sound different.
10.Touch <File Format>
to select the file format.
Display
Explanation
Saves the song in this unit’s format. You can listen to songs
saved in this format on the Roland HP-G/R series and KR
series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices. This
format is called “i-format”.
i-format
SMF
NOTE
Never turn off the power
while the saving operation is
in progress. Doing so will
damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
Saves the song as an SMF (Standard MIDI Files). Songs saved
in this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments
that can play SMF music files (p. 185).
A song recorded using commercial music files can’t be saved
in “Save As SMF” format for reasons of copyright protection.
11.Press the [Exit] button.
It’s a good idea to get into the
habit of moving the write-
protect tab on the floppy disk
to the “Protect” position when
you’ve finished saving your
data. Keeping the tab at
Save
12.Touch <Execute> to start saving.
The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more.
Don’t take the external memory out of the external memory port until the saving
process is finished.
“Protect” prevents operations
that could erase your songs by
mistake.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song File screen.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Deleting Saved Songs
This deletes songs that have been saved on external memories, or to Favorites.
To delete a song on an external memory, first connect the external memory to the
external memory port.
1.
2.
Press the [Song/File] button.
Touch <File>.
The “Song File screen” appears.
3.
Touch <Delete>.
A “Delete Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songdel.eps_60
4.
Touch <Media>
Touch <File>
to select the storage media.
5.
6.
to select the song to be deleted.
NOTE
Touch <Execute>.
Never turn off the power
while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will
damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
The selected song is deleted.
Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the operation
is finished.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song File screen.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
Copying Songs on External Memories
to Favorites
You can take songs saved on external memories and copy them to Favorites.
You can also copy songs in Favorites to external memories.
1.
Connect the external memory with the song to be copied to the external
memory port.
2.
3.
4.
Press the [Song/File] button.
Touch <File>.
Touch <Copy>.
The following “Copy Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songcopy.eps_60
Specifying the Copy Source
5.
6.
Touch the <Media>
to select the copy source storage media.
to select the song you want to copy.
Touch the <File>
When “Copy All” is selected, all of the songs on the external memory are copied to
Favorites.
Specifying the Copy Destination
7.
Touch <Favorites>
song.
to select the copy destination for the
If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that
location, the previously saved song will be erased. If you don’t want to erase a
previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the
destination column.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
NOTE
8.
Touch <Execute>.
Never turn off the power
Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the copy is
finished.
while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will
damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
The song from the external memory is copied to Favorites.
■ Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to External
Memories
Songs that’ve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto external memories.
In this case, in the “Copy Song screen” in Step 4 above, touch the arrow icon in the
center to point the arrow upwards. This sets the KR to copy the song in Favorites to
the external memory.
fig.d-songcopy2.eps_60
NOTE
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from external
memories to Favorites.
Some song data cannot copy
because they are copy
protected.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 User Program Registration
Determining the name of the User Programs
Saving Performance Settings
4. Touch <Rename>.
(User Program)
A “Rename screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-upgname.eps_50
Any collection of settings, including those describing the
current status of your data selections or settings Automatic
Accompaniment, can be saved to the [User Program] button.
You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User
Program] button. Saving your preferred combinations of
Music Styles and Tones, as well as other frequently used
settings, makes it more convenient.
You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KR.
fig.panel_UPG
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears of the cursor potion.
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character
group (A→B→C→A...).
→ For more on what can be registered to a User Program, refer to
“Parameters Stored in the User Program” (p. 184).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
1. Set the Music Style, Tone, and other data until the
settings are the way you want them.
2. Press the [User Program] button.
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
A “User Program screen” like the one shown below
appears.
fig.d-upg.eps_50
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button.
You’re returned to the Write User Program screen.
Determining the Write Destination
6. Touch
to select the write-destination
number.
3. Touch <Write>.
7. Touch <Execute>.
A “Write User Program screen” like the following
Program] button.
appears.
fig.d-upgwrite.eps_50
*
Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Writing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
→ You can restore the content registered to the [User Program]
button to the original factory settings. Refer to “Restoring the
Factory Settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 149).
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 User Program Registration
Calling Up Saved User
Programs
Saving the User Program Sets
Program] button and save them as a set to an external
memory, or to user memory.
You can easily call up settings saved to the [User Program]
button.
When saving to an external memory, first connect an external
memory to the external memory port.
1. Press the [User Program] button.
The “User Program screen” appears.
Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll
through the screen and display other name of User
Programs.
→ For more on working with the external memory, refer to
“Using External Memories” (p. 99).
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Touch <File>.
Touch the page icons <
> <
> to change pages.
2. Touch the name of the User Program you want to call
3. Touch <Save>.
up.
A “Save User Program screen” like the following
When you touch the name of the User Program, the
buttons or other performance settings instantly change
to the previously saved settings.
appears.
fig.d-upgsave.eps_50
■ Changing the Way User
Programs Are Called Up
When calling up registered User Programs, you can control
whether or not the Automatic Accompaniment settings are
also switched depending on how long you touch the touch
panel.
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
A settings screen like the following appears.
fig.d-upgopt.eps_50
Giving a Name to a Set of User Programs
4. Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears at the cursor position. For example
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you
through the available choices in that character group
(A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
3. Touch <Instant> or <Delayed> to select the setting.
Display
Instant
Explanation
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
Immediately after a User Program name is
settings also switch.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
The Automatic Accompaniment settings
switch after you touch and road the User
Program name for a few moments.
Delayed
5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program
screen.
Refer to p. 184 about the parameters stored in the User
Programs.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 User Program Registration
fig.d-upgload.eps_50
Determining the Save Destination
6. Touch <Media>
to select the save-
destination strage media.
7. Touch <File>
to select the save-
destination User Program number.
If a User Program set name is displayed, a User Program
set saved to that saved to that number is already.
If you select a number with previously saved User
Program set data, then save a new set of data to that
same number, the older User Program set will be
deleted. If you don’t want to lose any previously saved
User Programs, select a number in the save-destination
column that does not yet have a name.
Specifying the Set of User Programs to be
Loaded
4. Touch <
> <
> to select the storage media to be
read from.
Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll
through the screen and display other name of User
Programs.
Saving
8. Touch <Execute> to begin the save.
5. Touch the name of User Program to load.
6. Touch <Execute>.
screen.
*
Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
The selected User Programs are loaded to the [User
Program] button.
*
Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
→ When clearing the set of saved User Programs, refer to
“Deleting Saved User Program Sets” (p. 111).
■ Loading Saved User Program
Sets
User Programs that have been saved on external memories or
in user memory can be called up, on an individual set basis,
to the [User Program] button.
*
Note that calling up these User Programs results in the
deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the
[User Program] button.
When loading a set of User Programs from an external
memory, first connect the external memory to the external
memory port.
→ For more on working with the external memory, refer to
“Using External Memories” (p. 99).
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Touch <File>.
3. Touch <Load>.
A “Load User Program screen” like the following
appears.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 User Program Registration
Copying Sets of User Programs on
External Memories to the User
Memory
Deleting Saved User
Program Sets
external memories or in user memory.
You can copy sets of User Programs saved on external
memories and to user memory.
When deleting a set of User Programs on an external
memory, first connect the external memory to the external
memory port.
You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user
memory and to external memories.
1. Connect the external memory with the settings to be
→ For more on working with the external memory, refer to
copied to the external memory port.
“Using External Memories” (p. 99).
2. Touch the [User Program] button.
3. Touch <File>.
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Touch <File>.
4. Touch <Copy>.
3. Touch <Delete>.
A “Copy User Programs screen” like the following
A “Delete User Program screen” like the following
appears.
fig.d-upgcopy.eps_50
appears.
fig.d-upgdel.eps_50
Specifying the Copy Source
4. Touch <Media>
to select the strage
5. Touch <Media>
to select the strage
media.
media.
5. Touch
to select the set of User Programs
6. Touch <File>
to select the set of User
to be deleted.
Programs you want to copy.
6. Touch <Execute>.
When “All” is selected, all of the sets of User Programs
on the external memory are copied to user memory.
The selected User Programs are deleted.
*
Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
Specifying the Copy Destination
7. Touch <User>
to select the copy
destination for the set of User Programs.
If a User Program name is displayed, already a User
Program saved to that number is already.
If you select a number with User Programs data, and
then copy data to that number, the previously saved
User Programs are deleted. If you do not want to delete
the saved User Programs, select a number in the save-
destination column for which no name is displayed.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 User Program Registration
8. Touch <Execute>.
If you want to use the Load Next function to switch
among User Programs saved to external memory, make
sure to set Load Next in all of the User Program sets to
“On.” Also, be sure to set the Pedal Shift value so it is for
the same pedal.
The set of User Programs on the external memory is
saved to user memory.
*
Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
■ Selecting the Pedal Used for
Switching Settings (Pedal Shift)
■ Coping Sets of User Programs
Stored in the User Memory to
External Memories
3. Touch <Pedal Shift>
to select the setting.
Display
Explanation
You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and
copy them to external memories.
You can use a function assigned to the
pedal.
OFF
In this case, in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4
above, touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the
arrow to point up. This sets the KR to copy the User Program
set in the user memory to the external memory.
The left pedal is dedicated to switching
User Programs.The function assigned to
the left pedal cannot be used.
Left Pedal
The center pedal is dedicated to
switching User Programs.The function
assigned to the center pedal cannot be
used.
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying
sets of User Program set from external memories to user
memory.
Center Pedal
Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program
screen.
Using the Pedal to Switch
User Programs
You can assign the function of the sequential switching of the
“User Programs” to the pedal. That way, each time you
depress the pedal, the KR107 switches to the next User
Program.
■ Sequential Loading of User
Program Sets Stored
(Load Next)
When using the pedal to switch your User Programs,
you can also call up sequential sets of User Programs as
saved to external memory. This feature is called the
“Load Next” function.
Great for use in concerts and similar situations, this allows
you to prepare and save your User Programs in the sequence
they are to be used, and then call up User Programs in the
appropriate order while you perform, simply by depressing
the pedal.
3. Touch <Load Next>
to select the setting.
Explanation
Display
Switches Load Next off. The next press of
the pedal after the 36th User Program is
called up returns you to the first User
Program of the same User Program set.
1. Press the [User Program] button.
OFF
ON
2. Touch <Pedal> in the lower part of the screen.
A “PEDAL screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-upgopt.eps_50
Switches Load Next on. The next press of
the pedal after the 36th User Program has
been called up takes you to the first User
Program in the next User Program set.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program
screen.
The Pedal Shift and Load Next settings are stored in each
User Program set.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the [Exit] button.
Simultaneously Switching
User Program and
The User Program screen returns to the display.
Touch <Write> to save the setting to the User Program.
For more detailed information, refer to “Saving
Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 108).
Transmitting PC Numbers
You can have PC (Program Change) numbers be transmitted
to an external MIDI device when you switch the User
Program on the KR.
You can register PC number settings to each of the User
Programs, just as you can with button settings and other
settings preferences.
Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set
1. Press the [User Program] button, then touch the name
of the performance setting you want to set.
Setting the Transmission of the PC
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <
> <
> to switch the page to display
the following screen.
fig-upgPCset.eps_50
4. Touch
for the parameter and make the
settings.
Display
Description
Bank
Select MSB
Sets the Bank Select MSB.
Sets the Bank Select LSB.
Bank
Select LSB
Program
Change
Sets the Program Change messages
(Program Numbers).
This prevents the PC number from being
transmitted (Off), or sets the transmission
channel (Channel 1–16).
Tx PC
Channel
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
Commercially Available Music Files
Commercially available song file recorded in Roland’s SMF
Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)
format is also composed of sixteen parts.
By loading the song file from the external memory and using
Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously
the 16-Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song file.
recorded material while continuing to add performances of
other parts.
→ Although with commercially available Roland SMF music
data, Part 11 is included in the [2/Bass Accomp] track button,
other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons.
The KR is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen
parts. Since each part’s performance is recorded using one
tone, you can layer performances, using up to sixteen tones
for the data in one song. The function used to layer these
sixteen parts, one at a time, is called the “16-Track
*
With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit
the data.
Sequencer.”
fig.16track.e
■ The 16-Track Sequencer Screen
When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-
track Sequencer screen.
16-Track Sequencer
You can record performances for up to 16 parts,
overlaying them part by part, to create a single song.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
Part 1
Flute Part
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
The Menu screen appears.
Bass Part
Piano Part (left hand)
Piano Part (right hand)
2. Touch <16trk Sequencer>.
•
•
•
A “16-track Sequencer screen” like the one shown below
Part 16
appears.
fig.d-16tr.eps_50
16-Track Sequencer and Track Buttons
In addition to the “16-Track Sequencer” function, the “Track
Buttons” (p. 84) are another of the unit’s playing/recording
functions.
These five “Track buttons” are used for organizing the 16-
Track Sequencer’s sixteen parts. This allows you to use the
16-Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances
recorded with the Track buttons, and make even more
detailed edits of the songs.
You can easily play back the original song data with the 16-
Track Sequencer, mute parts by pressing the Track buttons,
and more.
Icon
Explanation
Touch to select the part to be recorded, or the
<1>–<16> part whose settings are to be changed. The
The Track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as
shown below.
button for the selected part changes color.
This Part to be played back
Track button
[R/Rhythm]
Part
D (10), S (11)
The Part not to be played back (Muted Part)
[1/Whole]
1
Parts that do not have performance data
recorded to them.
[2/Bass Accomp]
[3/Lower]
2, 5–9, 12–16
3
4
Solo
Mute
[4/Upper]
This allows you to prevent the sound for the
selected part from playing.
you cannot use Layer performance (p. 26), Split performance
(p. 27), or other such functions to record two or more tones
simultaneously. Also, you can’t record the performance with
Automatic Accompaniment.
The performance data for the selected part is
deleted.
Clear
This displays the Part Settings screen, in which
you can make detailed settings for each part.
For details refer to p. 115.
Options
When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment,
then you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer
to “Recording With Accompaniment” (p. 93)
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
Icon
Explanation
4. Touch
for the corresponding item to change
The Tone Set screen appears. For details refer
to p. 116.
Tone Set
the setting.
You can adjust the values by touching the desired
parameter and turning the dial or by touching and
dragging the slider.
■ Modifying the Settings of Each Part
You can change the Tones and volume, as well as mute the
playback, for each individual part in songs recorded with the
16-track Sequencer and the internal songs.
Display
Volume
Explanation
Changes the volume level.
→ Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are
also made up of 16 Parts, you can change the settings for the
individual Parts and play them back in the same way.
Changes the amount of reverb effect
applied to the sound.
Reverb
Chorus
Changes the amount of chorus applied.
First, select the song for which the settings are to be made
(p. 65).
Shifts the direction from which the sound is
heard between left and right.
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 114).
Panpot
Touch
to shift the sound to the right,
to shift it to the left.
2. Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want
to make settings.
or touch
Change the settings for the selected Part.
What’s Panpot?
Display
Solo
Function
Panpot is the control that determines the placement of
the sound in the stereo sound field between left and
right speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can
change the perceived location of the sound between the
left and right speakers.
Only the selected Part is played back.
Toggles playback of the selected Part to on
or off.
Mute
Clear
The performance data for the selected part is
deleted.
*
When you touch <Clear>, a message asking you to confirm the
deletion appears. To erase the recorded sound, touch <OK>. If
you don’t want to erase the recorded sound, touch <Cancel>.
Once a performance has been erased, it can’t be restored.
When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, you
hear what the song sounds like as you change the
settings. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)]
button, playback of the song stops.
*
You cannot touch <Clear> during playback of the song.
5. Touch
to make settings for other parts.
3. Touch <Part> to make more detailed settings for the
selected part.
The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen.
Change the settings for other parts as needed.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-16trpart.eps_50
6. Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press the [
(Reset)] button.
This operation set the changes in the settings.
The song can then be saved to an external memory or to
user memory.
If you do not want to delete a song after changing the
settings for the individual parts, save the song to an
external memory or to user memory (p. 102).
*
You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds
for each individual part are played or not (solo and mute).
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed.
When selecting Part 10 or 11, you can touch <Drum Set>
to select the drum set or effect sound.
The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of
the screen.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
If the Following Message Appears
■ Recording a Performance
❍ Step 1 Prepare for Recording
Selecting the Song to Record
If you try to display another screen after you’ve changed the
song’s settings for each Part, a message like the one below
may appear.
fig.m-songmod.eps
1. Hold down the [Song] button and press the [
(Rec)]
button.
The following screen is displayed if there is any
previously recorded performance or any song with
changed settings.
fig.m-songmod.eps
Touch <OK> to change the song’s settings.
Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes you’re made.
■ Getting the Most Suitable Part
Tones for the Musical Genre
(Tone Set)
Touch <OK> to delete the song.
“Tone Set” is a function that automatically assigns the most
suitable tones for the selected musical style.
Determining the Song’s Beat and Tempo
When you’re creating a song, you can assign Tone sets, then
change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song.
2. Press the [Metronome] button to select the beat (p. 44).
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 114).
→ You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. If you
want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through
the song, take a look at “Changing the Beat in the Middle of a
Song (Beat Map)” (p. 128).
2. Touch <Tone Set> in the lower part of the screen.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-16trtone.eps_50
3. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the basic
If you do not need the metronome sound, press the
[Metronome] button once more.
→ When using song data that has already been recorded, the
recording is made using the source song’s basic tempo. To
change the basic tempo of a song, please refer to “Changing the
Tempo of Recorded Songs” (p. 128).
3. Touch the screen to select a musical genre.
4. Press the [Exit] button.
The 16-track Sequencer screen appears.
Tones for each part are assigned automatically.
*
In some genres, some parts may have no tone assigned.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
❍ Step 2 Start Recording
Changing the Recording
Method (Rec Mode)
You can use any of the four methods below to record with
the KR.
If necessary, choose a recording method.
For more on how to record, refer to the following paragraph.
If you record for the first time, there’s no need to select the
recording method.
Although you will normally be using “Replace Recording,”
where previously recorded material is erased when new
easily by using this method in combination with other
recording methods.
Selecting the Part to Record
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 114).
2. Touch the number for the Part you want to record.
The button for the touched part being set turns orange.
Replace Recording (p. 118)
Selecting the Sound to Play
This is the normal method for recording. New material is
recorded as previously recorded material is erased.
3. Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play.
After selecting a Tone, press the [Exit] button to call up
Mix Recording (p. 118)
the “16-Track Sequencer screen.”
New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded.
You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on
Part D (10) or Part S (11). You can select drum sets or
effect sounds by selecting Part D (10) or Part S (11) and
touching <Drum Set>.
This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record
melodies over prerecorded accompaniment.
Loop Recording (p. 118)
Recording the Performance
Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, while new notes
are combined with existing music. A convenient feature for
creating rhythm parts. Loop Recording allows you to record
over and over within a selected segment, adding a different
percussion sound with each pass.
4. Press the [
(Reset)] button.
Recording will start at the beginning of the song.
If you want to record from a point other than the
beginning, use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)]
buttons to select another measure to begin.
Punch-in Recording (p. 119)
5. Press the [
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a
recorded performance.
light up.
→ Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is
The KR is put in recording standby.
selected.
6. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Changing the Recording Method
1. Press the [Menu] button.
A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.
*
You cannot use the performance pads when recording with the
16-track sequencer.
The Menu screen appears.
fig.d-menu1.eps_50
7. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
When one part is recorded, continue by selecting and
recording another part. Continue layering parts to finish
recording the song.
→ You only need to follow the procedure described in “Step 1
Prepare for Recording” when you’re recording the first Part.
For the second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed
from “Step 2 Start Recording.”
*
Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the
power to the KR is turned off. It is a good idea to save song
data to an external memory or user memory. For more
information, refer to “Saving Songs” (p. 102).
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
2. Touch <Rec Mode>.
■ Layering a Recording Over
Previously Recorded Sounds
(Mix Recording)
A “Rec Mode screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-recmode.eps_50
You can record a performance layered over a previously
Recording.”
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
The KR is set to the mix recording mode.
Record the performance using the procedures described
in “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons
(Redoing Recordings)” (p. 96), “Multitrack Recording
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114), or other
methods.
3. Touch <Rec Mode>
to select the recording
mode.
Display
Recording Method
Replace Recording
Mix Recording
Loop Recording
*
After you have finished with mix recording, return to the
usual replace recording mode.
Replace
Mix
■ Repeated Recording at the
Loop
Same Location (Loop Recording)
Auto Punch-
In/Out
Punch-in recording of the interval
between set markers.
You can record a specified passage over and over, layering
Punch-in recording starting from the
point at which the pedal, the
For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a
four-measure segment. First record the bass drum, the snare
drum next, then the hi-hat and so on, layering a different
instrument onto the same four measures. After you have
123) to create as many copies of the four measures as you
need to complete your Rhythm part.
Manual
Punch-In/Out
Performance Pad or the [
button is pressed.
For more about Punch In Recording,
refer to p. 119.
(Rec)]
You can add tempo changes to a
recorded composition. See p. 128.
Tempo
4. Press the [Exit] button.
Returns to the Menu screen.
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the
passage you want to record.
Previous Recording
Take a look at “Setting Markers for Repeated Practice
(Marker)” (p. 85).
(Replace Recording)
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then use “Blank
Recording” to create the necessary number of measures
before placing the markers.
The recording process where previous material is erased as
1. In the “Rec Mode screen” (p. 117), select <Replace>.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
The KR is set to the replace recording mode.
Record the performance using the procedures described
in Chapter 4 (p. 90), “Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts
(16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114).
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
What is Blank Recording?
Blank Recording is recording a number of silent
measures with no content.
You can also use the method described below to set Loop
Recording.
1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song.
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of
the passage you want to record.
2. Hold down the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [
Stop)] buttons both light up, then after two
(Rec)] button and press the
Practice (Marker)” (p. 85).
[
(Play/
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then perform
“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of
measures before placing the markers.
measures of the count sound, recording begins.
3. Without performing anything, record only the
2. Touch the <Repeat> icon in the Marker screen
(p. 86).
[
(Play/Stop)] button.
This sets the loop recording mode.
Start a recording.
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [
(Play/
Stop)] buttons both go out, and recording stops.
*
After you have finished with loop recording, touch the
<Repeat> icon in the “Marker screen” once more to
return to the usual replace recording mode.
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 117), select <Loop>.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the menu screen.
The recording method changes to loop recording.
■ Re-Recording Part of Your
Performance (Punch-in Recording)
3. Press the [
(Rec)] button.
You can re-record part of a passage as you listen to a
recorded performance. This recording method is called
“Punch-in Recording.” This convenient function lets you
record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a
prerecorded performance in another section.
4. Press the Track button for the track to be recorded.
The KR is put in recording standby.
5. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to begin
recording.
User Punch-In Recording by the following two methods:
Recording starts from Marker A.
Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B
(Auto Punch-In/Out)
When the song reaches Marker B, it then returns to
Marker A, where recording continues.
Before you start recording, place markers A and B to
define the passage you want to re-record. Make the
setting for punch-in recording, and re-record just the
passage between markers A and B.
Each time the recording is looped, the newest sounds are
layered over previously recorded sounds.
6. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button,
Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or
Buttons Are Pressed (Manual Punch-In/Out)
recording stops.
*
After you have finished with loop recording, return to the
usual replace recording mode (p. 117).
You can play back a performance and depress the pedal
at the desired place to start re-recording. Depressing the
pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to
playback.
Instead of pressing the pedal, you can press a
performance pad or the[
cancel recording.
(Rec)] button to start and
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
2. Begin recording.
Begin recording using the procedures described in
“Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing
Recordings)” (p. 96) or “Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114).
1. Before you start re-recording, place markers A and B to
define the passage.
Following the procedures described in “Setting Markers
for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 85), use Markers A
and B to specify the passage.
The previously recorded performance will be played
back.
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 117), select <Auto Punch In/
Out>.
fig.d-rec-punch.eps_50
Press the pedal to which Punch In/Out is assigned (p.
144), a performance pad, or the [
(Rec)] button to
begin recording, then start your performance.
Recording stops when you press the pedal, the
the previously recorded performance is played back.
3. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
performance stops.
*
When you’re finished with Punch-In Recording, return to the
Recording.”
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
3. Begin recording.
Begin recording using the procedures described in
“Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing
Recordings)” (p. 96) or “Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114).
Up until the specified passage, the previously recorded
performance plays back.
When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased
as recording starts; begin playing now.
When you reach the end of the specified passage,
recording stops, and the KR returns to playback of the
previously recorded performance.
4. When you press the [
song stops.
❍ Starting Recording from the Measure
Specified by Buttons and Pedals
If using the Performance Pads or pedals, you must first
change the function of the pedals and Pads. Follow the
procedures in “Assigning Functions to Pedals and
Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User Functions)” (p. 144),
and assign <Auto Punch In/Out> to the buttons or pedal.
1. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 117), select <Manual Punch
In/Out>.
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In
Recording.”
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
Composing an
Accompaniment By Entering
Chords (Chord Sequencer)
5. Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment
pattern.
Refer to “Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer.”
You can enter a chord progression and choose the places
where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an
accompaniment for a song. This feature is called “Chord
Sequencer.”
6. When you have finished inputting all the data, touch
<Execute>.
When storage of the data is complete, return to the Menu
screen.
Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an
accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your
right hand.
Now, press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, and try
playing the melody along with the accompaniment you
created.
1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light
*
Songs you’ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the
power. If you do not want to delete the song, save it to an
external memory or to user memory. Refer to “Saving Songs”
(p. 102).
up.
The Menu screen appears.
2. Touch <Chord Sequencer>.
Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer
The screen like the one shown below is called “Chord
Sequencer screen.”
fig.d-chordseq.eps_50
Move the cursor
Change the accompaniment arrangements
This is the “cursor.” The cursor
shows where the chord change
or other information is input.
This is the end of the song. When
continuing to add input, insert
measures by touching <Ins>.
Select the accompaniment pattern (Division)
1. Use the dial to move the cursor to the input position.
Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move
This indicates the position where the
accompaniment pattern (Division) or
the Style Orchestrator changes.
2. Enter the chord progression and the changes in the
accompaniment pattern and arrangement.
Display
Accompaniment, press the keys to specify a chord, and
press a button to select the accompaniment pattern (p.
58). You can change the Style Orchestrator with the
Performance Pads (p. 59).
One measure is inserted before the measure
where the cursor is positioned.
Ins
Del
The measure in which the cursor is
positioned is deleted.
3. Touch <Ins> once to insert one measure before the
Allows input of chords without playing the
keyboard. Refer to “Inputting Chords
without Playing the Keyboard” (p. 122).
measure where the cursor is currently positioned.
Chords
If you touch <Del>, the measure where the cursor is
currently positioned is deleted, while the measures that
follow are moved forward.
All Clear
Clear
Deletes the data at the cursor position.
To remove what you have input, move the cursor to the
position with input you want to delete, then touch
<Clear>. This deletes the entered setting.
Records the input chord progression. Touch
this icon when you have finished inputting
all of the chords.
Execute
→ You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song. When
you add an intro, the number of bars corresponding to the
length of the intro is inserted automatically.
3. Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select
a Music Style (p. 51).
4. Press the [Exit] button.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the Pedals
and the Performance Pads
Editing Songs
There are many ways you can edit performances recorded
using the KR Track button or 16-track sequencer.
→ For instructions on assigning functions, refer to “Assigning
Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/
User Functions)” (p. 144).
■ Basic Operation of the Editing
• Inputting a short Intro and Ending
Functions
Assign “Intro 2/Ending 2" to a pedal or pad.
*
While songs are being loaded, the measure number in the
upper right of the screen is highlighted (text and background
are inverted). Start editing the song only after the measure
number is no longer highlighted.
• Inputting a “Variation” or “Original” without a Fill-In
Assign “Original/Variation” to a pedal or pad.
• Using the keyboard to input slash chords (such as Fm/C)
Assign “Leading Bass” to a pedal or pad.
Selecting the Editing Function
• Inputting a break somewhere within the song
Assign “Break” to a pedal or pad.
1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.
The Menu screen appears.
• Insert half fill-ins (fill-ins lasting half a measure)
Assign “Half Fill In” to a pedal or pad.
2. Touch <Song Edit>.
A “Song Edit screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-edit1.eps_50
Check the Accompaniment You Inserted
Here’s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as
you have input.
1. Press the [
(Reset)] button to return to the
beginning of the song.
2. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
performance is played back.
3. Playback stops when you press the [
(Play/Stop)]
button once more.
3. Touch an editing function to select that function.
■ Inputting Chords without
For more detailed information, refer to the
corresponding page for each function.
Playing the Keyboard
You can use <Chords> at the bottom left of the Chord
Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen.
Function
Undo
Explanation
Page
p. 123
p. 123,
p. 124
Undoes editing operations that
have been performed.
1. At the Chord Sequencer screen, touch <Chords>.
Copy
Copies measures
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-chordinput.eps_50
Evens out sounds in recorded
performances.
Quantize
Delete
Deletes measures.
p. 124
p. 125
p. 125
Insert
Inserts a blank measure.
Transposes parts individually.
Transpose
Erases data in measures, creating
blank measures.
Erase
p. 126
p. 126
p. 127
p. 127
Part
Exchange
Exchanges the sounds in parts.
Allows corrections to be made
note by note.
Note Edit
PC Edit
2. Touch
in each to specify the chords.
Allows editing of the Tones
changes that occur during a song.
3. Touch <Execute> to enter the chord.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
→ ”PC” stands for “Program Change,” which is a command that
that rely on the use of a variety of sounds, a “PC” needs to be
located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be
changed
You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in
the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy
when you’re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.
fig.e-copy.e
Ex. To copy measures 5–7 to measure 8.
*
Some edits can’t be undone, not even by choosing “Undo.” We
recommend saving songs to external memories or to user memory
before editing. For more on how to save songs, refer to “Saving
Songs” (p. 102).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Editing
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4. Touch the item to be edited.
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Copy>.
5. Set the value with the dial.
To cancel the operation once it is underway, press the
[Exit] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-copy.eps_50
6. When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
When you are finished editing the setting, return to the
“Song Edit screen.”
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
→ You can play back edited songs by pressing the [
(Play/
Stop)] button in the “Song Edit screen.”
■ Undoing Edits (Undo)
Item
From
For
Content
You can cancel an editing operation that you’ve just carried
out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and
restore data to the way it was before.
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be copied
Number of measures to be copied
*
There are some edits that can’t be restored.
Copy-source Track button or part number
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Undo>.
Choosing “All” copies all Parts. “- - -” appears
in the <Dst> column.
If you choose a Track, you can only copy to the
selected Track. You cannot copy to the other
Track. “- - -” appears in the <Dst> column.
Src
Dst
Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen.
fig.d-e-undo.eps_50
Copy-destination part number
Data can be copied in the following three ways:
Replace
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, this previous recording is erased,
and the copied data is written in its place.
Mix
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, the copied data is layered over the
previous recording. If the Tones used for the
copy source and copy destination are different,
the copy-destination Tone is used.
Mode
If you touch <Cancel>, the undo is cancelled, and you’re
returned to the Song Edit screen.
If you touch <OK>, the confirmation message appears on
screen. Touch <OK> to undone the most recent edit.
Insert
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, the copied portion is inserted
without erasing the previous recording. The
song is lengthened by the number of inserted
measures.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
Item
Content
Item
Content
Quantization timing
Copy-destination measure number
To
When “End” is selected, the data is copied to
the end of the song.
Select one of the following values
1/2 (half note), 1/4 (quarter note),
1/6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/8 (eighth note),
1/12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/16 (sixteenth
note), 1/24 (sixteenth-note triplet),
1/32 (thirty-second note)
Resolution
Times
Number of times the data is to be copied
■ Correcting Timing
Discrepancies (Quantize)
When finished with the Quantize settings, return to the Song
Edit screen.
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded
performance by automatically aligning the music with the
timing you specify. This is called “Quantizing.”
■ Deleting Measures (Delete)
You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure.
When a portion of a performance is deleted, the rest of the
performance is shifted up to fill the gap. Erasing measures in
As an example, let’s say that the timing of some quarter-
notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can
quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus
a specified passage is called “deleting.”
fig.e_delete.e
making the timing accurate.
fig.e-quantize.e
Example: Quarter-note resolution
Actual note data
Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5–8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
2
3
4
Note data after quantization
1
2
3
4
5
6
Example: Sixteenth-note resolution
Actual note data
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Delete>.
1
3
4
Note data after quantization
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-del.eps_50
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Quantize>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-quant.eps_50
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be deleted
Item
From
Content
Number of measures to be deleted
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be quantized
Track button or part number to be deleted
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is deleted.
For
Number of measures to be quantized
Track button or part number to be
quantized
Tr/Pt
Choosing “All” quantizes the same passage
in all Parts.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Inserting Blank Measures
(Insert)
■ Transposing Individual Parts
(Transpose)
You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This
You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.
addition of a blank measure is called “insertion.”
fig.e_insert.e
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Transpose>.
Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-trans.eps_50
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Insert>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-ins.eps_50
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be transposed
Number of measures to be transposed
Track button or part number to be transposed
Tr/Pt
Bias
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is transposed.
The range of transposition
Item
From
For
Content
You can select the range to transpose the data,
from -24 (two octaves down) to +24 (two
octaves up), adjustable in semitones.
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be inserted
Number of measures to be inserted
*
You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and
sound effect sets (such as the Rhythm Track).
Track button or part number where data will be
inserted
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, blank measures are
inserted at the same place in all parts.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
■ Making Measures Blank
Item
Content
(Erase)
Expression
Erases Expression (volume change) information.
You can delete the performance data in a specified block of
measures, turning them into blank measures without
reducing the length of the song. This process is called
Event
Lyric
Erases only lyrics.
“erasing.”
fig.e_erase.e
Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part
with the notes recorded for another part. This process of
exchanging parts is called “part exchange.”
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Part Exchange>.
Blank measures
Follow the steps in “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122)
to choose <Erase>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-partex.eps_50
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-erase.eps_50
Touch each
exchange.
to choose Parts you want to
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be erased
Number of measures to be erased
Track button or part number to be erased
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is erased.
Select from the following types of performance
data to erase:
All
All performance data, including notes, tempos,
tones switches, volume changes, etc., are erased.
Tempo
Tempo data is erased. Erasing the tempo data for
all measures results in a single, constant tempo.
Event
Prog.Change
Erases the data for switching Tones (p. 123).
Note
Erases only notes.
Except Notes
Erases all of the performance data except for the
notes.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
■ Correcting Notes One by One
■ Modifying the Tone Changes in
(Note Edit)
a Song (PC Edit)
You can make corrections in a recorded performance one
note at a time. This process of making changes in individual
In some songs, the instrument sound changes during the
course of the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of
This instruction is called a “Program Change” (PC), and
actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the
selected Tone by them are called “PC editing.”
You can make these corrections by using note editing:
• Deleting misplayed notes
• Changing the scale of a single note
• Changing the force used in playing a single key (velocity)
• Change the finger number
*
It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or
beat that does not contain a program change.
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Note Edit>.
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<PC Edit>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.e-note.e
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-pc.eps_50
Location Pitch Velocity Finger
Number
Location
Tone name
The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick: Finger
Number” as the format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter
than a beat.
The PC-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the
format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
Touch
to select the part with the program
Touch
to select the part with the note to be
change to be edited.
corrected. The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or
Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or
use < > < > on the screen to find the note to be corrected.
use < > < > on the screen to find the program change to
be edited.
When you’ve found the note you want to correct, touch
“Pitch” or “Velocity” for the note.
When you’ve found the Program Change you want to
modify, touch “Tone Name” on the screen.
Use the dial to correct the pitch or velocity. If you want to
delete the note, touch <Delete>.
Press a Tone button to select a Tone group, then select a Tone
with the dial. When selecting Part 10 or 11, select the drum
set or effect sound.
When you’re done making all the settings, press the [Exit]
button.
If you want to delete the Program Change, touch <Delete>.
When you’re done making all the settings, press the [Exit]
button.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
Changing the Beat in the Middle
of a Song (Beat Map)
Changing the Tempo of
Recorded Songs
You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic
tempo was initially set when the song was recorded.
You can create songs that have beat changes during the
course of the song.
*
You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. Before
recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.
1. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo.
(Rec)] button and press the
1. Press the [Menu] button.
[
(Reset)] button.
The Menu screen appears.
The song’s basic tempo changes.
2. Touch <Beat Map>.
The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn
off the power or choose a different song. Save important
song data to external memory or to user memory (p.
102).
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-beatmap.eps_50
*
If the song you’re working on has tempo changes, press the
[
(Reset)] button to go back to the beginning of the song
before you carry out this operation.
Changing the Tempo Within
the Song
3. Use <
><
> in the screen or the [
(Bwd)]
and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move to the measure
You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.
whose beat you want to change.
The KR stores song tempo information and performance data
separately. Therefore, when making changes to the tempo in
a song, you must record the changes in the tempo
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
screen.
Touch <
Touch <
> to move to the beginning of the song.
> to move to the end of the song.
information independently of the performance data.
This recording of the tempo is called “Tempo Recording.”
4. Touch
in each to set the beat.
■ Adjusting the Tempo While
5. Touch <Execute>.
Listening to a Song
The beat change starts with the measure you selected.
Repeat Steps 3–5 to make beat settings in other measures
as needed.
You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo
changes.
Setting the Rec Mode to “Tempo”
Recording the Performance
1. Press the [Menu] button.
6. Press the [Exit] button twice.
2. Touch <Rec Mode>.
7. Press the [
(Reset)] button to return the measure
A screen like the one shown below appears.
number to “1.”
8. Start a recording.
Record the performance using the procedures described
in “Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance”
(p. 90). Specify the measure, then change the beat.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs
fig.d-rec-tempo.eps_50
Particular Measure
You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected
measure. This is handy when you want to make a sudden
change in tempo.
First, carry out Steps 1–3 of “Changing the Tempo Within the
Song” (p. 128) to make the “Tempo Recording” settings.
1. Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move
to the measure where you want to change the tempo.
3. Touch the <Rec Mode>
to select <Tempo>.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
Basic screen.
This makes the setting for tempo recording.
Press the [Exit] button a number of times to switch to the
screen where the measure number is indicated in the
upper right of the screen.
2. Press the [
flashing.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
The KR is put in recording standby.
When the KR goes into Tempo Recording, the tempo
indication is highlighted.
3. Use the TEMPO [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the
tempo.
Recording the Tempo
4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
4. Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to
The song’s tempo changes starts with the measure you
selected.
move slightly before the measure where you want to
change the tempo.
5. Press the [
flashing.
The KR is put in recording standby.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
5. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
change in tempo stops.
6. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button,
*
You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
recording begins.
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “Changing the
Recording Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 117).
7. When you get to the place where you want to change
the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial
to vary the tempo as desired.
data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an
explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings,
refer to “Making Measures Blank (Erase)” (p. 126).
recording stops.
The song’s tempo changes.
*
You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
Tempo Recording Shortcut
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “Changing the
Recording Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 117).
Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press one of the
Tempo [-] [+] buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording
settings. Record tempo information. In this case, tempo
recording is canceled when recording ends.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles
■ Creating New Styles by
Creating Original Styles
(User Styles)
Although the KR features a variety of internal Music Styles,
you can also create your own. These original Styles are called
“User Styles.”
Combining Internal Music
Styles (Style Composer)
You can create a new style by selecting from among the
Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2,
Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4, Accompaniment
5,and Accompaniment 6 parts in different Styles. This
function is called the “Style Composer.”
You can use either of the two methods described below to
create a User Style.
Style Composer
*
You can only combine the KR’s built-in Styles.
With this method, you combine internal Music Styles to
create new Styles. You can create a new Style by selecting
from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1,
Accompaniment 2, Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4,
Accompaniment 5, and Accompaniment 6 parts in different
styles.
Displaying the Style Composer Screen
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
fig.d-menu1.eps_50
Style Converter (p. 132)
Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from
songs composed with the 16-track sequencer.
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and the
KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the
Style.
Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a
“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with
three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.
2. Touch <Style Composer>.
*
If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
fig.m-styledel.eps
Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Save User
Styles to external memories, or to user memory (p. 135).
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is
deleted, and a new User Style is created.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles
A “Style Composer screen” like the one shown below
Selecting the Styles Assigned to Each Part
3. Touch the part to be set.
appears.
fig.d-stylecomp.eps_50
4. Press a Music Style button, then select a Style with the
touch screen or the and the dial.
When you have decided on a Style, press the [Exit]
button to display the Style Composer screen.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each
Part.
Deciding on a Style
6. Touch <Execute>.
You have created a new Style.
Display
Part
The User Style is recorded to the Music Style [User]
button. Try playing with the new Style.
R
B
Rhythm
Bass
*
If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to
delete the Style, save it to an external memory or to user
memory. Take a look at “Saving a User Style” (p. 135).
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Accompaniment 1
Accompaniment 2
Accompaniment 3
Accompaniment 4
Accompaniment 5
Accompaniment 6
❍ Muting Parts for a Particular Division
You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific
Divisions.
accompaniment pattern, every part other than
“Accompaniment 1" is muted. With this arrangement, when
the accompaniment pattern changes from the original to the
variation, it creates a more elaborate effect in the
accompaniment.
Icon
Function
All Clear
Deletes all of the settings.
You can mute the sound of particular
Parts for a Particular Division” (p. 131).
Mute
→ For more on Divisions, refer to the “Style Arrangements” (p.
132).
Clear
Deletes the Styles in selected parts.
1. Touch the Style Composer screen to choose the Part
The Part Settings screen is displayed,
allowing you to make detailed settings
to each part. For more information, take
a look at “Editing the Volume and Effect
Settings for Each Part” (p. 132).
you want to mute out.
2. Press the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button
Part
to switch to the division that you want to mute.
3. Touch <Mute> on the screen.
Records the created Style to the Music
Style [User] button. Touch this when
you have finished creating the Style.
Execute
The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you
selected.
If you want to hear the muted-out Part, touch <Mute>
again.
*
To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds (intro,
ending, or fill-in), touch <Mute> immediately after switching
to the Division.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles
❍ Editing the Volume and Effect Settings for
■ Creating a Style from a Song
You Composed Yourself
(Style Converter)
Each Part
Displaying the Part settings screen
1. At the Style Composer screen, touch <Part>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-scomp-part.eps_50
You can take a song you’ve composed yourself and extract
the portions you need to create your own original Style.
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify some of the chords, and the KR
automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the
style. This function is called the “Style Converter.”
Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a
“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with
three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.
When creating a song in order to create an music style, it’s
good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style.
Style Arrangements
Modifying the Settings of Each Part
Music Styles created with the Style Converter function are
composed of eight parts: “Rhythm,”
2. Touch the <Part>
to select the part with
the settings to be changed.
“Bass,”“Accompaniment 1,“”Accompaniment 2,”
“Accompaniment 3,””Accompaniment 4,“”Accompaniment
5,” “Accompaniment 6.”
The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper
part of the screen.
A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro,
melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.
3. Touch
for each parameter to change the value.
You can also change the values by touching each
With the KR, such changes in songs are allocated to the
following six performance states. We call these six parts of a
song “Divisions.”
parameter name and then using the dial.
Display
Volume
Explanation
Adjusts the volume.
Division
Intro
Performance division
Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied
to the sound.
The intro is played at the start of a song.
This is played at the end of a song.
This is a basic accompaniment pattern.
Reverb
Chorus
Ending
Original
Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied
to the sound.
Changes the left-right direction from which
the sound appears to come.
This is a developmental accompaniment
pattern. It is a variation on an Original.
Variation
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a
juncture where the mood changes. It is used
to make a song more lively.
Fill-In To
Variation
Panpot
When you touch
, the sound moves to
to move the sound to
the right; touch
the left.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a
juncture where the mood changes. It is used
to make a song more sedate.
Fill-In To
Original
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing a Tone button to change the Tone while this
screen is displayed. When selecting Rhythm Part, you
can touch <Drum Set> to select the drum set or effect
sound.
You can make a song more lively or more restrained by
increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can
also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the
Divisions.
Finishing the Settings
4. Press the [Exit] button.
The Style Composer screen appears.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles
A “Style Converter screen” like the one shown appears.
fig.d-styleconv.eps_50
❍ Creating Styles in Auto Mode
Points to note when creating songs
• Use one of the major, minor, or diminished seventh
chords to create the song. We recommend using
diminished seventh chords to compose the song.
• It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for
Rhythm
Bass
Accomp Accomp Accomp
1
2
3
D (10)
2
7
8
Parameter
Settings Content
→ When using parts other than Part 2, 7, 8, 9, and D, refer to
Name
“Changing an Extracted Part” (p. 134).
Conv.Mode
Switches the mode (Auto/Manual)
Creating songs
Chord root for the segment to be
extracted
1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
Chord Root
Record the song after referring to “Multitrack Recording
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114) and other
related sections.
Chord type for the segment to be
extracted (major/minor/seventh)
Chord Type
Division
From
Division
When using music data, first select a song (p. 65).
Measure number of the first measure of
the segment to be extracted
Displaying the Style Converter screen
2. Press the [Menu] button.
For
Number of measures extracted
The Menu screen appears.
3. Touch <Style Converter>.
Making the Settings
4. Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the dial to switch the
*
If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected, the
message “Please select a song” appears. Use the [Song] button
to select a song (p. 65), then start the procedure again.
mode to “Auto.”
This makes the setting for the Auto mode.
*
If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
5. Touch <Chord Root> and <Chord Type>, then use the
dial to input the chord root and type for the segment to
be extracted.
fig.m-styledel.eps
6. Touch <Division>, then use the dial to select the
Division.
Display
Intro
Performance division
Intro
Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Please save the
User Style on an external memory or in the internal memory
(p. 135).
Original
Original accompaniment pattern
From the fill-in to the variation
Fill To
Vari
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is
deleted, and a new User Style is created.
Variation
Fill To Ori
Ending
Variation accompaniment pattern
From the fill-in to the original
Ending
*
Only one measure can be extracted when “Fill To Vari” or
“Fill To Ori” is selected for the Division. The number of
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles
measures may also be limited in other Divisions.
Creating Songs
7. Touch <From> and <For>, then use the dial to select the
1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
measures to be extracted.
Record the song after referring to “Multitrack Recording
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114) and other
related sections.
Touching <Play> at the bottom of the screen, you can
listen to performance of the portion which you chose.
When using music data, first select a song (p. 65).
8. Repeat Steps 5–7 to create Styles for all of the
Displaying the Style Converter screen
2. Press the [Menu] button.
Divisions.
*
If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum pattern.
3. Touch <Style Converter>.
Deciding on a Style
The “Style Converter screen” appears.
4. Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the dial to switch the
touch <Execute>.
mode to “Manual.”
The User Style is recorded to the [User] button.
This makes the setting for the Manual mode.
*
*
If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to
delete the Style, save it to an external memory or to user
memory. Take a look at “Saving a User Style” (p. 135).
After that, the steps are the same as for “Creating Styles
in Auto Mode” (p. 133).
When you touch <Play> in the lower part of the screen,
with <Options>.
The following data is saved to the User Style. If a song
includes data other than this, the results you get might not be
what was intended.
❍ Changing an Extracted Part
• Keyboard performance data
• Amount of Reverb effect applied
You can extract and change part of a song created with 16-
track sequencer.
• Amount of Chorus effect applied
1. At the Style Converter screen (p. 133), touch <Part>.
❍ Creating a Style in Manual Mode
When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode, you can
clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each
individual chord.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-styleconv.eps_50
Points to Note when Creating Songs
• Record your performance with the three chord types of
diminished seventh, major, and minor.
• It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for
the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
Accomp Accomp Accomp
Chords Rhythm Bass
1
2
3
Major
Seventh
Minor
2
2. Touch the performance Part with settings you want to
change.
-
-
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
3. Use the dial to specify which 16-track Sequencer
performance part you want to extract.
→ The chords all share the same Rhythm Part.
→ In the Manual mode, the type of chords appear at the bottom of
→ If you want to use the performance of other part, check out
the screen. Set the Parts for all chords.
“Changing an Extracted Part” (p. 134)
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style Converter
screen.
The Style Converter screen appears.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles
fig.d-stylesave.eps_50
Saving a User Style
You can save the User Styles you create to external memories
and the user memory. When saved to the user memory, User
Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off. You can
also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the
Music Style [User] button.
You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory.
What is the User Memory?
The user memory is the area within the instrument
where User Styles created with the KR, sets of User
Programs, and other such data are stored.
Determining the Name of the Style to be
Saved
5. Touch <Rename>.
saved on external memories.
A “Rename screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-stylename.eps_50
Data saved to the user memory is not deleted, even
when the KR’s power is turned off.
→ When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user
memory and restore the settings to the factory settings, refer to
“Formatting the User Memory” (p. 152).
Preparations for Saving Data
When saving to an external memory, first connect an external
memory to the external memory port.
1. Press the Music Style [User] button.
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
A “User Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears at the cursor position.
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character
group (A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
2. Touch <User>.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
3. Touch <File>.
4. Touch <Save>.
6. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
A “Save Style screen” like the following appears.
button.
Determining the Save Destination
7. Touch <Media>
to select the save-
destination strage media.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles
■ Deleting Saved User Styles
8. Touch
to select the save-destination
This deletes User Styles that have been saved to external
memories or in user memory.
number.
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to
that number.
When deleting a User Style on an external memory, first
connect the external memory to the external memory port.
If you select a number with a previously saved User
Style and then save to that number, the previously saved
User Style is deleted. If you do not want to delete the
User Style being saved, select a number in the save-
destination column that does not yet have a name.
1. Press the Music Style [User] button.
A “User Style screen” appears.
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in
the lower part of the screen.
9. Touch <Execute>.
2. Touch <File>.
The saving process starts.
3. Touch <Delete>.
A “Delete Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-styledel.eps_50
* Never turn off the power or eject the external
memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.
4. Touch <Media>
to select the strage
media.
5. Touch
or
to select the Style to be deleted.
6. Touch <Execute>.
The selected Style is deleted.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external
memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles
Specifying the Copy Destination
Copying Styles on External
Memories to the User
Memory
You can take User Styles saved on external memories and
copy them to user memory.
7. Touch <User>
to select the copy destination
for the Style.
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to
that number.
If you select a number with a previously saved Style and
then copy to that number, the previously saved Style is
deleted. If you do not want to lose the Style being saved,
select a number in the save-destination column that does
not yet have a name.
You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and
copy them to external memories.
1. Connect the external memory with the Style to be
copied to the external memory port.
8. Touch <Execute>.
2. Press the [User] button.
The Style on the external memory is copied to user
memory.
A “User Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50
* Never turn off the power or eject the external
memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.
■ Copying Styles Saved in the
User Memory to External
Memories
You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to
external memories.
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in
the lower part of the screen.
In this case, touch the large arrow icon in the center of the
“Copy Style screen” in Step 4 above so that the arrow points
upwards. Turn the KR will copy user memory Styles to the
external memory.
3. Touch <File>.
4. Touch <Copy>.
A “Copy Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-copystyle.eps_50
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying
Styles from external memories to user memory.
Specifying the Copy Source
5. Touch <Media>
to select the copy source
media.
6. Touch <File>
to select the Style you want to
copy.
When “All” is selected, all of the Styles on the external
memory are copied to user memory.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
■ Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
Changing the Settings for
One-Touch Arranger
(Key Touch)
You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the
keys.
■ Procedure
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 138), touch <Key Touch>.
fig.d-p-key.eps_50
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to
display the Basic screen.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_50
Display
Explanation
2. Press the [Option] button.
Notes sound at an unchanging volume level,
regardless of how lightly or forcefully you
play the keyboard.
Fixed
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-funcmenu1.eps_50
This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You
can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less
forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard
feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for
children, whose hands have less strength.
Light
This sets the keyboard to the standard touch.
You can play with the most natural touch.
This setting is closest to the response of an
acoustic piano.
Medium
This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You
have to play the keyboard more forcefully
than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so
the keyboard touch feels heavier. This
setting allows you to add more expression
when playing dynamically.
Parameter
Explanation
Name
Heavy
Refer to “Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
Key Touch
(Key Touch)” (p. 138).
Selects the setting to be specified when the
One Touch Program [Arranger] button is
pressed (p. 139).
One Touch
Setting
Touch any of the icons <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or
<Heavy>, to set the key touch for the keyboard.
Sets the key at which the keyboard is divided
Split Point
To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen.
(the split point) (p. 139).
Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the left
to make the key touch lighter.
Arranger
Config.
Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment
plays sounds (p. 139).
You can also change the key touch by pressing the
[Piano Designer] button. For more details, refer to the
Quick Start.
You set the tuning and make a variety of other settings
for the KR107 starting with the second page of the
settings screen.
3. Touch the name of the parameter to be set.
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
■ Changing Music Styles Without
(One Touch Setting)
■ Changing the Keyboard’s Split
Point (Split Point)
This sets the point (the split point) where the keyboard is
divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using
the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split
performances (p. 27).
Normally, when you select a Music Style, the Tone and
tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected
automatically. However, you can also set it so the tempo and
Tone settings don’t change when you change Music Styles.
The setting is at “F#3” when the KR is powered up.
fig.splitpoint.e
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 138), touch <One Touch Setting>.
F 3 (Split Point)
fig.d-1touchset.eps_50
B1
B6
Split Point Settings Range
The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 138), touch <Split Point>.
fig.d-splitpoint.eps_50
Display
Explanation
Suitable
Tone
The suitable tone for a Music Style is
selected automatically.
Suitable
Tempo
The suitable tempo for a Music Style is
selected automatically.
Other
Setting
Other settings (Style Orchestrator, etc.) are
changed automatically.
Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off.
All items are set to ON when you turn on the power.
Parameters switched to OFF (highlighted in orange) do not
change, even when the Music Style is changed.
Touch either <C3>, <F#3>, <C4>, or <F#4> in the lower part
of the screen.
The key you chose becomes the split point.
To set another key as the split point, touch
the screen, then specify the key.
in
You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.
■ Changing How Chords Are
(Arranger Config)
This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are
played, and how the keys are pressed to specify chords.
What are the Chord Tone and Bass Tone?
When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, and Sync
Start (p. 55) is turned off, chords are produced when you
play in the left-hand side of the keyboard. This is called the
“chord tone,” and the root of the chord that is played at the
same time is called the “bass tone.”
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 138), touch <Arranger Config>.
fig.d-arrset.eps_50
How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode:
• Intelligence 1
Major
Ex:
C
Play the chord root.
Seventh
Ex: C 7
Play the root and
the second key above it.
Touch
Parameter
of each item to make settings.
Major Seventh
Ex: C maj 7
Value
Explanation
Play the root and
the first key below it.
Name
All Music Style parts
are played.
All
Minor
Ex: C m
Only Music Style
rhythm parts, chord
Tones, and bass
Accomp
Play the root and
the third key above it.
Chord&Bs
Tones are played.
OFF,
Minor Seventh
Acoustic Bs.,
A. Bass+Cymbl,
Fingered Bs.,
Picked Bass.,
Fretless Bs.,
Slap Bass1,
Ex: C m7
Play the root,
the third key above it, and
the second key below it.
Selects the bass Tone.
When set to “OFF,”
no tone is played.
Bass Tone
Diminished
Organ Bass,
Synth Bass 101,
Thum Voice
Ex:
C dim
Play the root and
the sixth key above it.
OFF, E.Piano 1,
E. Piano 2,
Soft E. Piano,
Hard E. Piano,
Slow Strings,
Strings,
• Intelligence 2
Major
Selects the chord
Tone. When set to
“OFF,” no tone is
played.
Chord Tone
Ex:
C
Play the root of the chord.
Choir,
Doos Voice
This selects the way
chords are played
Intelligence function.
When you set this to
“Manual,” play all of
the notes describing
the chord.
Seventh
Ex: C 7
Play the root of the chord
and the white key to the
left of the root.
Chord
Intelligence 1,
Recognition Intelligence 2,
Mode Manual
Minor
Ex: C m
Play the root of the chord
and the black key to the
left of the root.
What is Chord Intelligence?
“Chord Intelligence” (p. 49) is the name of the function that
recognizes the chords being specified for an accompaniment
when only one or two keys of the chords have been pressed,
which can be used while automatic accompaniment is active.
Minor Seventh
Ex: C m7
Play the root of the chord
and the black and white key
to the left of the root.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
Placing a Marker in the
Middle of a Measure
A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected
measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a
position partway through a measure.
For detailed information about count, refer to “Match the
Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count In)” (p. 83) and
“Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
(Countdown)” (p. 57).
For detailed information about Marker, refer to “Setting
Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 85).
1. Press the [Count/Marker] button.
1. Press the [Count/Marker] button.
The Count screen appears.
2. Touch <Marker>.
The Count screen (p. 83) appears.
2. Touch
of each item to make settings.
3. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Metronome
The Marker screen appears.
screen.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
3. Press the [Option] button.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
Parameter Name
Value
4. Touch <Resolution>
to choose the marker
Count In
setting.
(add a count before the
performance),
Countdown
(add a count only before
you begin playing),
Count In/down
(add both a count-in and
a countdown)
Indication
Explanation
Count Mode
Specify what type of count
will be added.
This lets you place a marker at the
beginning of the measure.
Measure
Beat
This lets you place a marker at the
beginning of the beat.
5. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Marker screen.
Countdown Sound
Specify the countdown
sound.
Voice (Japanese),
Voice (English)
Countdown Track
Lower & Upper Tracks
Lower Track
Upper Track
Specify the track or part that
will determine the beginning
of the performance when
added a countdown.
Part 1–16
Stick, Click, Electronic,
Voice (Japanese), Voice
(English), Wood Block,
Triangle Castanets,
Handclap
Count-In Sound
Specify the count-in sound.
Animal
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
Other Settings
Parameter Name
Measures
Specify the length (number of
measures) of the count-in.
Value
You can change the tuning, the language shown on the
1, 2
display, and other settings to make the KR easier to use.
■ Procedure
Repeat
When “Repeat” is turned ON
on the Marker screen (p. 87)
this specified whether the
count-in will sound each time
the range between the
markers is repeated, or only
the first time.
1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch
Program [Piano] button.
First, Every
2. Press the [Option] button.
A “Functions screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
When you press the [Option] button on the Basic screen,
the first page displayed shows the parameters for the
Automatic Accompaniment settings (p. 138).
Parameter
Tuning
Explanation
Changing the tuning methods.
Pedal
Setting
performance pad (p. 144).
Master Tune
Sets the KR’s standard pitch (p. 146).
connected external display (p. 158).
ExternalDisplay
display (p. 147).
Language
User Image
Display
used (p. 147).
Opening
Message
Sets the message that appears when
the power is turned on (p. 148).
MIDI Setting
Refer to p. 161.
Program
Change
Refer to p. 161.
the KR (p. 148).
Memory Backup
MIDI Ensemble
Refer to p. 161.
Memory Backup to the original factory
settings (p. 149).
Factory Reset
V-LINK
Refer to p. 159.
Changing the functions of the remote
control’s buttons (p. 149).
Remote Control
USB Driver
Refer to p. 166.
Sets the remote sensor’s on or off (p.
150)
Remote Sensor
Allows for calibration of the touch
screen (p. 150).
Touch Screen
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
Tuning
system
Characteristics
3. Touch the name of the parameter you want to set.
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
This temperament is a modification of
meantone temperament and just
intonation, allowing more freedom of
modulation. Performances are possible
in all keys (III).
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
Kirnberger
■ Changing the Tuning (Tuning)
❍ Choosing the Tuning
This temperament is based on the
theories of the Greek philosopher
Pythagoras, and has pure fourths and
fifths. Chords containing a third will
sound impure, but melodies will sound
good.
You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic
temperaments (tuning methods).
Pythagorean
Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal
temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at
one time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems
in existence. By playing in the temperament that was in use
when a composition was created, you can experience the
sonorities of chords originally intended for that song.
This temperament is a partial
compromise of just intonation in order
to allow modulation.
Meantone
This temperament is a combination of
meantone and Pythagorean
temperaments. It allows you to play in
all keys. (First method, number three.)
Werkmeister
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Tuning>.
fig.d-p-temp.eps_50
Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system.
When playing in a temperament other than equal
temperament, you must specify the tonic (the note
corresponding to C for a major key, or to A for a minor key)
of the key in which you will play.
Touch <Key>
to select the tonic.
If you have selected equal temperament, it is not necessary to
select the tonic.
You can choose from among the eight tunings described
below.
❍ Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)
Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and
the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This
method of tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as
“stretched tuning.”
Tuning
Characteristics
system
This temperament divides the octave
into 12 equal parts. All intervals will be
Equal
slightly out of tune by the same amount.
This setting is in effect when you turn on
the power.
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning
compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is
called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces
subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.
This temperament makes the 5th and
3rd intervals pure. It is unsuited to
playing melodies and cannot be
transposed, but is capable of beautiful
sonorities.
Just (Maj)
Touch the Stretch Tuning <ON> or <OFF> icon to select the
tuning curve.
When set to “ON,” the tuning curve features extended low
and high ranges (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for piano
solos. This setting is selected when the power is turned on.
Just intonation differs between major
and minor keys. The same results as
major can be obtained in a minor key.
Just (min)
Arabic
When set to “OFF,” the standard tuning curve is used. It is
suitable when playing in an ensemble with other
instruments.
This tuning is suitable for the music of
Arabia.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
■ Assigning Functions to Pedals
and Performance Pads (Pedal
Setting/User Functions)
If you set the pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting
User Programs, the function assigned to the pedal
cannot be used. Refer to “Using the Pedal to Switch User
Programs” (p. 112).
You can assign a variety of functions to the left and center
pedals, the expression pedals, and the performance pads.
You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the
❍ Functions that Can be Assigned (Pedals,
corresponding pedal or pad.
925
Performance Pads)
Function
Explanation
NOTE
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
Toggles the Leading Bass function* on or
off. The function stays on as long as the
pedal to which this is assigned is pressed.
When assigned to a Performance Pad, this
is alternately switched on and off each time
the pad is pressed.
Leading
Bass
❍ Assigning Functions to Pedals
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Pedal Setting>.
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50
Only the Rhythm part is played. After No
Chord is switched on, specifying a chord
by playing the actual keys cancels the
function, and all of the accompaniment
parts are played.
No Chord
Break
During the performance of Automatic
Accompaniment, the accompaniment
stops for one measure only.
Fill In to
Variation
Performs the same function as the Fill In
[To Variation] button (p. 58).
Fill In to
Original
Performs the same function as the Fill In
[To Original] button (p. 58).
A fill-in is inserted, but the accompaniment
pattern after that doesn’t change.
Touch
to assign functions to each of the pedals.
Fill In
This plays a fill-in half a measure long,
then switches to the Variation
accompaniment pattern.
Half Fill In to
Variation
Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button restores
the piano performance functions to the pedals (p. 19).
This plays a fill-in half a measure long,
then switches to the Original
accompaniment pattern.
Half Fill In to
Original
❍ Assigning Functions to Performance Pads
1. Press the [User Function] button and watch the
Original/
Variation
without inserting a fill-in.
indicator light up.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-usrfunc.eps_50
When this function is used during
Automatic Accompaniment, the
accompaniment returns to the beginning of
the Division (p. 47).
Arranger
Reset
Ending] button (p. 55). Intro 1 and Ending
1 are played.
Intro 1/
Ending 1
Performs the same function as the [Intro/
Ending] button (p. 55). Intro 2 and Ending
2 are played.
Intro 2/
Ending 2
Arranger
Start/Stop
Performs the same function as the [Start/
Stop] button (p. 55).
Orchestrator This changes the accompaniment to a more
Up elavorate arrangement (p. 59).
2. Touch
to assign functions to each of the
Performance Pads.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
❍ Functions that Can be Assigned (Pedals
Function
Explanation
Only)
Orchestrator Changes the accompaniment to a simpler
Down
arrangement (p. 59).
Function
Explanation
Turns the Melody Intelligence function on
and off (p. 60).
Melody
Intelligence
Pressing the pedal during playback of a song
stops the playback. When the pedal is
beginning of the measure that was playing
when the pedal was pressed. When the pedal
is pressed in rapid succession, the playback
will resume backs up the same number of
measures as the number of times the pedal is
pressed.
This starts Automatic Accompaniment
with a fade-in (where the volume gets
progressively louder), ends it with a fade-
out (where the volume gets progressively
softer), then stops.
Composer
Assist
Fade In/Out
Rotary Slow/ This switches the speed of the rotary effect*
Fast
when you perform with an organ tone.
While the pedal or Performance Pad is held
down, the pitch of the sound drops
Upper
Sostenuto (p. 19).
The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal
temporarily, returning to the original pitch
when the pedal or Pad is released. This can
be effective for simulating the performance
of instruments like a Hawaiian guitar.
Glide
Upper Soft The pedal functions as a soft pedal (p. 19).
Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds
in the left-hand side of the keyboard during a
split performance.
Lower
Damper
Composer
Play/Stop
Performs the same function as the [
(Play/Stop)] button (p. 65).
This raises the pitch of notes you play on the
keyboard.
Bend Up
If a song is stopped with the score shown in
the KR display, the notation in the KR
display scrolls to the next page when you
press the pedal.
Page
Fwd 1
Bend
Down
This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the
keyboard.
When the pedal is pressed during a layer
performance, the Tone volume changes
between two levels, depending on how firmly
the pedal is pressed.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX1” selected
increases the layer Tone volume. The layer
Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of
how forcefully the keys are played.
If a song is stopped with the score shown in
the KR display, the notation in the KR
display scrolls to the preceding page when
you press the pedal.
Page
Bwd 1
EX1
If a song is stopped with the score shown in
the external display, the notation in the
when you press the pedal.
Page
Fwd 2
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX2” selected
increases the layer Tone volume.The layer
Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of
how forcefully the keys are played.
If a song is stopped with the score shown in
external display scrolls to the preceding
page when you press the pedal.
EX2
EX3
Page
Bwd 2
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX3” selected
increases the layer Tone volume, while the
volume of the left-hand Tone is decreased.
The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,
regardless of how forcefully the keys are
played.
During Punch-in Recording, this starts and
stops recording (p. 119).
Punch In/Out
You can set the tempo according to the
interval at which the pedal or pad is
pressed (p. 82).
Tap
Tempo
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX4” selected
increases the layer Tone volume, while the
volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased.
* What is the leading bass function?
EX4
The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord
as the bass tone is called “Leading Bass.” When this function
is turned on, the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions
are used. Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as
the bass tone.
NOTE
The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal
if “Pedal EX1–4” is assigned to more than one pedal.
* What is the rotary effect?
This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound, similar
to the sound when a rotary speaker is used.
Using the “Bend Up” or “Bend Down” function during a
split performance (p. 26) changes the pitch of sounds in
the right-hand side of the keyboard. Additionally, the
range in which the pitch can change when the Bender
Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this
spinning effect.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50
effect is used is called the “bend range”; refer to
“Changing the Bend Range (Pedal Setting)” (p. 146).
❍ Functions that can be assigned (Expression
Pedals Only)
Function
Expression Adjusts the overall volume.
When the pedal is pressed during a layer
Explanation
performance, the Tone volume changes
between two levels, depending on how
firmly the pedal is pressed.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX1”
selected increases the layer Tone volume.
The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,
regardless of how forcefully the keys are
played.
Touch <Bend Range>
setting.
to adjust the bend range
EX1
You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in
half-tone steps, up to one octave).
■ Changing Standard Pitch
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX2”
selected increases the layer Tone volume.
The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,
regardless of how forcefully the keys are
played.
EX2
“Standard pitch” generally refers to the pitch that is heard
when you play middle A. When performing in an ensemble
with other instruments, adjust the standard pitch so that the
instruments of the ensemble match. Tuning all the
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX3”
selected increases the layer Tone volume,
while the volume of the left-hand Tone is
decreased. The layer Tone is played at a
fixed volume, regardless of how forcefully
the keys are played.
instruments to a standard pitch is called “master tuning.”
EX3
EX4
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Master Tune>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-tuning.eps_50
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX4”
selected increases the layer Tone volume,
while the volume of the right-hand Tone is
decreased.
■ Changing the Bend Range
(Pedal Setting)
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a
played note is called the “bender effect.”
You can assign the bender function to a pedal, then apply the
bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal.
Touch
to change the pitch.
Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415.3–466.2 Hz.
You can also make a setting that determines how much the
pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The
maximum range of change in pitch is called the “bend
range.”
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Pedal Setting>.
Touch
to switch the screens.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
fig.d-usrimage.eps_50
■ Changing the Language
(Language)
Five choices are available for the language used in displaying
information on the screen.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Language>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-lang.eps_50
Selecting the Display to be Set
1. Touch <KR Display> or <Ext. Display>.
Select the setting either for “KR display” or “Ext.
display” images.
Selecting the Images to be Displayed
First, take an external memory to which the image data
stored in the KR has been saved, and connect the
external memory to the external memory port.
Touch
to select the language.
Available settings
2. Touch <File>.
English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-usrimage2.eps_50
NOTE
German, Spanish, and French are displayed for some functions.
Other screens will be displayed in English.
■ Selecting Images To Be Shown
on the KR and External
Displays
(User Image Display)
You can have image data from computers and other devices
When you touch <Preview>, you can then show the
selected image data on the display selected in Step 1.
4. Touch <Save>.
when the instrument’s power is turned on. Refer to the
procedure in “Changing the Settings for Showing
Images with the External Display and the Television
(External Display)” (p. 158) to set the instrument so the
“Ext. display” image is displayed on the external
display.
The selected image data is stored.
5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
To clear the stored image data, touch <Erase>.
❍ Image data that KR can display
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <User Image
Display>.
320 x 240 pixels (for KR display)
Size
640 x 480 pixels (for external display)
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Format
BMP format
“.bmp”
Extension
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
When the Power Is Turned On
(Opening Message)
■ Remembering the Settings
Even When the Power is
Turned Off (Memory Backup)
You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase
when the power is turned on.
the settings will be remembered even when the power is
turned off. This function is called “Memory Backup.”
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Opening Message>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-openmsg.eps_50
For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup,
refer to “Parameters Stored in Memory Backup” (p. 184).
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Memory Backup>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-memory.eps_50
Use
to move the cursor.
When you touch the character icon, the character is input
where at the position.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the
character appears at the cursor position. For example,
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the
available choices in that character group (A→B→C→A...).
Touch <Execute>.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
Touch <OK> to store the setting.
When the setting has been stored in memory, the previous
screen will reappear.
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through
“English (upper case),” “English (lower case),” “numerals,”
“symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”
NOTE
Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is
deleted.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
When you have finished inputting the characters, touch
<Execute>.
NOTE
Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
If you touch <All Clear> at the bottom of the screen and
then touch <Execute>, the display reverts to the screen
that normally appears when you turn on the power to
the instrument.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
■ Restoring the Factory Settings
■ Changing the Functions of the
(Factory Reset)
Remote Control’s Buttons
You can return the content stored with “Memory Backup” (p.
148) and the User Programs (p. 108) to their original factory
settings. This operation is referred to as “Factory Reset.”
You can change the functions assigned to the remote
control’s buttons.
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Remocon Setting>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
NOTE
When you perform a Factory Reset, all settings that have been
This operation does not return the touch screen
calibration settings to the original factory condition. To
return the touch screen calibration settings to the
Screen Calibration Settings to the Original Factory
Settings” (p. 151)
Changing the [
1. Touch <PLAY>
] (PLAY) Button Functions
to assign functions to
When you want to restore the content registered to the
KR’s User memory to the factory condition, refer to
“Formatting the User Memory” (p. 152).
[
] (PLAY) button.
Display
Explanation
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch “Factory Reset.”
Songs are played back continuously in
sequence, starting from the currently
selected song.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-factory.eps_50
Internal Song
Songs in the selected genre are played
back continuously.
All Song
Play
“Favorites” Songs
Songs registered to the “Favorites” are
played back in sequence.
Songs on External Memories and
Floppy Disks
Songs within the selected folder are
played back continuously.
Touch <Execute>.
One Song
Play
Only the selected song is played back.
Playback stops when the song is finished.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
Touch <OK> to restore the original factory settings.
The songs are played back in random
order.
Internal Song
The songs in all genres are played back in
random order.
When you have finished making the settings, switch off the
power, then switch it back on again.
When you touch <Cancel>, the settings are left untouched,
and you’re returned to the previous screen.
Random
Play
“Favorites” Songs
Songs registered to the “Favorites” are
played back in random order.
NOTE
Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
Songs on External Memories and
Floppy Disks
Songs within the selected folder are
played back in random order.
2. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
Changing the [FUNC1] [FUNC2] Button
Functions
Display
Explanation
Fast forwards and rewinds the song.
When [-] button is pressed, the song
rewinds; when [+] button is pressed, the
Bwd/Fwd
1. Touch <FUNC1> <FUNC2>
to assign
functions to [FUNC1] [FUNC2] button.
NOTE
Display
Explanation
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions
screen.The remote control buttons’ original function
assignments are restored when the power is turned off. If you
want to save the changed settings, carry out the memory
backup (p. 148).
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2]
button is pressed, switch the color used
for lyric in the display.
Lyric Color
Pressing the button while the song is
playing back stops the playback. When
you release the button, playback resumes
from the beginning of the measure being
played when you pressed the button.
Pressing the button a number of times in
rapid succession moves the playback
position back by the same the number of
measures, after which playback resumes.
■ Switching the Remote Sensor
On and Off (iR function)
Replay
You set the Remote Sensor to On (active) or Off (disabled).
When switched on, infrared transmission remote control
information is received.
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2]
button is pressed, the lower track is
switched on or off. When turned off, the
sound from the lower track does not play.
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch “iR function.”
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Track 3
Track 4
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2]
button is pressed, the upper track is
switched on or off. When turned off, the
sound from the upper track does not play.
Zoom
Displays an enlarged notation.
Playback repeats within the marked
range.
Repeat
2. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
Changing the TEMPO [-] [+] Button and the
TRANSPOSE [-] [+] Button Functions
Touch <ON> or <OFF>
1. Touch <TEMPO> or <TRANSPOSE>
to
(Touch Screen)
assign functions to TEMPO [-] [+] and TANSPOSE [-]
If you’ve been using the touch screen for some time, the
pointer may be shifted, making the KR react incorrectly. You
should correct this displacement when necessary by
performing calibration (repositioning).
[+] button.
Display
Explanation
Changes the tempo. Pressing [-] button
slows the tempo down; pressing [+]
button speeds up the tempo.
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch “Touch Screen.”
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Tempo
Scrolls the notation in the external display.
Press [-] button to return to the previous
page; press [+] button to advance to the
next page.
Score Page
Transpose
Transposes the song. Pressing [-] button
lowers the pitch in semitone steps;
pressing [+] button raises the pitch in
semitone steps.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
Selecting the Part to Which
the Effect is Added
(EffectsPart)
You may find effects not being applied to certain parts when
different effects are applied to the upper tone, layer tone, and
lower tone. In such instances, you can select which effect is to
have priority.
1. Press any tone button, and select the tone (p. 23).
2. Touch <Effect>.
Touch <Execute>.
Touch the points indicated.
3. Touch <Part>.
NOTE
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Do this carefully, because touching a location that’s different
from the one indicated for the pointer may make the
displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer
accurately.
When the calibration is finished, touch <Write> to store the
settings.
NOTE
If you don’t write them to memory, the calibration settings will
be discarded as soon as the power is switched off.
Returning the Touch Screen Calibration
Settings to the Original Factory Settings
4. Touch
to select the part to which the effect
If you touch <Factory Reset> in the above screen, the touch
screen calibration settings revert to the original factory
settings.
is added.
The effect will be applied to the selected part and other
parts to which the same effect has been applied.
Available settings
Upper, Layer 1, Layer 2, Lower 1, Lower 2
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
The KR features an internal storage area where you can save
recorded performances and User Styles. This space is called
the “User Memory.”
Automatically Starting the
Quick Tour
You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts
automatically with no operation required.
The following content is stored to the user memory.
• Content registered to the “Favorites” (p. 69)
• Sets of saved User Programs (p. 109)
1. Hold down the [Transpose] button and press the
[Ambience/Reverb] button.
• User Styles saved on user memory (p. 135)
• Image files set with the “User Image settings” (p. 147)
The Quick Tour screen appears.
2. Press the [Option] button.
To delete all of the content held in the user memory and
restore the original factory settings, carry out the following
procedure.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
1. Press the [Song/File] button.
2. Touch <File>.
3. Touch <Format>.
4. Touch
to select “User.”
5. Touch <Execute>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
3. Touch
of each parameter to make settings.
Item
Display
Explanation
This setting determines
whether or not Quick Tour
starts when no adjustment
or other operation is
Auto Start ON, OFF
performed within a fixed
period of time.
This setting determines
whether or not
background music is
added when Auto Demo
begins.
6. Touch <OK>.
BGM
ON, OFF
All of the content in the user memory is deleted.
If you touch <Cancel>, the deletion is cancelled, and
you’re returned to the previous screen.
When Auto Start is set to “ON,” a period of five to ten
minutes passes without the instrument being touched,
the demo automatically starts. The demo stops playing if
the instrument is operated in any way. When Auto Start
the icon in the Demo screen.
NOTE
Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Quick Tour
screen.
Carrying out this operation does not initialize any
settings other than the user memory settings. To restore
settings other than those for the user memory to the
original factory settings, carry out Factory Reset (p. 149).
→ This setting is saved even after the power is turned off.
*
For more information about Quick Tour, refer to the Quick
Start.
*
You cannot start the demo songs if you have any performance
recorded but not saved. Before starting the demo, either delete
or save the song when the song delete screen(p. 90) is
displayed.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
Adjusting the Piano Designer
Resonance
You can made precise changes to the Piano Designer
“Resonance” setting.
Disabling Functions Other
Than Piano Performance
(Panel Lock)
The “Panel Lock” function locks the KR in a state where only
piano performance can be used, and all buttons will be
disabled. This prevents the settings from being inadvertently
modified even if children press the buttons accidentally.
More of the resonance effect is applied as the value is
increased.
1. Press the [Piano Designer] button.
*
In the Panel Lock state, only the grand piano sound can be
played.
2. Press the [Option] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
1. Turn down the volume all the way.
2. Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power.
3. While holding down the [Wonderland/Game] button,
press the [Power] switch and turn on the power.
Hold down the button for at least ten seconds (until the
animation is displayed).
All buttons except for piano play are disabled.
Adjust the volume. When you play the keyboard, the
grand piano sound will be heard.
To undo the Panel Lock function, turn the volume down
to the minimum, and turn on the power once again.
3. Touch
of each item to make settings.
Item
Explanation
With an acoustic piano, playing a
note causes the strings for other keys
already being pressed to resonate.
The function that reproduces this
resonant sound is called “String
Resonance.”
String
When the damper pedal on an
acoustic piano is pressed, the sound
of the key that is played causes other
strings to resonate, adding rich
reverberation and breadth to the
sound. This function reproduces the
resonant sound created by pressing
the damper pedal (Damper
Damper
Key off
Resonance).
This reproduces the “key off” sound
(the subtle sound made when the
keys are released) produced when
playing an acoustic piano.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Various Settings
■ Viewing Song Information
Detailed Song Playback
Settings
(Information)
You can view file names and other information concerning
songs.
■ Changing the Tone Settings
When Playing Back Songs
(Play Mode)
1. Press the [Song/File] button.
2. Touch <File>.
With the normal setting, GS tones (sounds that are
to play back song data. By changing this setting, you can play
back song using KR-specific tones for certain portions of the
data.
3. Touch <Information>.
A song information is displayed.
■ Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics)
Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke,
as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data.
When you play such music files, the lyrics automatically
appear in the screen. If you do not want lyrics to appear
automatically, set this to “OFF.”
For detailed information about GS, refer to “About the
KR Sound Generator” (p. 185).
1. Press the [Menu] button.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
The Menu screen appears.
Touch
to switch the screens.
Touch
to switch the screens.
2. Touch <Play Mode>.
2. Touch <Lyrics>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-plymode.eps_60
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-lyric.eps_60
3. Touch the icon to choose the setting.
Icon
Explanation
3. Touch
to select the setting.
Playback uses GS-compatible tones for
performances that sound like other GS
instruments.
Display
Explanation
GS
KR
Lyrics are displayed automatically (when
performance data containing lyrics is played
back).
ON
Playback uses KR tones for greater
expressiveness. However, differences may
appear when playing back using devices
Lyrics are not displayed, even if the song
OFF
4. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Menu screen.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
5. After changing this setting, try selecting the song once
again.
Even when this is set to “OFF,” you can still have the lyrics be
For more detailed information about selecting a song,
refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 65).
displayed by touching <
or Basic screen (p. 21).
> when it appears in the Piano
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
After changing this setting, try selecting the song once
again.
For more detailed information about selecting a song,
refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 65).
The screen may be switched when you press the button
while the Lyrics screen is displayed. To have the lyrics
displayed again, touch <
screen, or stop playback of the song, then press the
(Play/Stop)] button.
> on the Piano or Basic
[
■ Changing the Parts Assigned
to the Track Buttons During
SMF Playback (Track Assign)
Normally, when playing back Roland Piano Digital-
compatible SMFs (p. 185), the lower part is assigned to the
[3/Lower] button, and the upper part is assigned to the [4/
Upper] button. However, assignment of the upper and lower
parts may differ with some SMF data.
If you cannot get the upper and lower parts to work well set
on “Auto,” then change the setting to “2/1 Part” or “3/4
Part.”
This setting is effective with internal songs, registered
songs for favorites, and SMF format song data.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
Touch
to switch the screens.
2. Touch <Track Assign>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-trkasgn.eps_60
3. Touch
to select the setting.
Display
Explanation
The part assigned to each track will be
determined automatically,
Auto
depending on the song data.
Part 1 will be assigned to the upper part
track, part 2 to the lower part track, and part
3 to the user track.
2/1 Part
3/4 Part
Part 4 will be assigned to the upper part
track, part 3 to the lower part track, and part
1 to the user track.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
You can connect the KR to external devices such as audio
Connecting an External
equipment, MIDI instruments and computer.
Display or Television
❍ Connecting an External Display or Television
You can connect a computer monitor or other external
display or a television to the KR107, enabling you to display
the Song Select screen, your favorite images, song lyrics, and
the Song Select screen, your favorite images, song lyrics, and
notations on a larger screen.
notations on a larger screen.
❍ Connecting Video Equipment (p. 159)
You can switch screens with the remote control. For
details, see “Using the Remote Control” (p. 71).
With a V-LINK compatible device connected, you can switch
images with the keyboard.
❍Connecting MIDI Devices (p. 160)
You cannot simultaneously use both an external
display and a television with the KR107. Moreover,
neither the external display nor the television will be
able to display properly if both are connected at the
same time.
You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance
data from the KR, or play performance data from the KR on
the sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound
module, you can perform on the KR and hear the sounds
played through the MIDI sound module.
When using an external display, connect the display to
the Ext Display connector, but do not connect a
television to the Video Out connector.
The KR has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you can
also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive
sound.
Out connector, but do not connect any external display
to the Ext Display connector.
You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording
equipment and record your performances.
For more information about external display settings, refer to
“Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the
External Display and the Television (External Display)” (p.
158).
❍ Connecting a Computer (p. 165)
You can use a sequencer program (such as Roland Visual-
MT) to record performance data from the KR and play
performance data from the program on the KR.
■ Connecting an External
❍Connecting an Expression Pedal
Display
You can connect an expression pedal to the KR.
Displays That Can Be Connected to This
Instrument
Connect the Expression pedal to the Expression Pedal
jack on the rear panel of the KR107.
In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan
monitors that are available on the market are compatible
with this instrument. However, before you connect any
monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:
925
NOTE
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
Resolution
640 x 480 pixels
31.5 kHz
Horizontal scan frequency
Vertical scan frequency
Connector
60 Hz
3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type
Analog
Signal
NOTE
Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the
frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not
compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect
image output when images move, and in certain cases may even
damage the display.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
rest’s moving parts. Keep the base of the display within
one of the areas shown by the dotted lines in the
illustration below.
Making the Connections
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Areas for placing the display
D-sub 15 pin
(Mini)
D-sub 15 pin
(Mini)
Display Cable
(Sold separately)
KR Bottom
Ext Display Connector
• If you are placing the display on top of the KR, we
recommend using a liquid crystal display (LCD). If using
a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, take extra care to
ensure that the display rests stably on the instrument.
External Display
1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the display to be
connected.
2. Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the
Turning the Power Off
display to the Ext Display connector on the KR107.
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
NOTE
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR107.
2. Turn off the KR107.
display when a television is connected to the Video Out
jack. To use an external display, first disconnect the
television from the Video Out jack, then connect the
external display.
3. Turn off the connected display.
■ Connecting a Television
3. Switch on the KR107.
Video Cable
(Sold separately)
4. This sets the display format (p. 158).
5. Switch on the connected display.
KR107’s Jack Panel
Video Out jack
Television
For more on handling the external display, refer to your display’s
owner’s manual.
Making the Connections
Always be sure to use the following procedure when
connecting a television.
You can also remove the music rest, then place the display there so
that it faces forward. For instructions on removing the music rest,
refer to “Removing the Music Rest” (p. 18).
NOTE
You cannot display information or images with a television
when an external display is connected to the Ext Display
connector. To use an television, first disconnect the
external display from the Ext Display connector, then
connect the external display.
1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the television to
be connected.
2. Use a video cable (sold separately) to connect the
KR107’s Video Out jack with the television’s video
input jack.
When using the KR107 with a display placed on it, be sure to
note the following precautions.
3. Turn on the power to the KR107.
4. This sets the display format (p. 158).
5. Turn on the power to the television.
• Make sure the display sits stably on the KR107 before
use.
• Do not let the base of the display rest on any of the music
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
Notes When Switching the Display on External
Displays and Televisions
■ Changing the Settings for Showing
Images with the External Display
and the Television
(External Display)
This selects the content shown on the external display or the
• Lyrics are not displayed with audio CDs.
• You cannot display any lyrics screen when playing back
music data that does not include lyrics data.
• The internal songs include a number of jazz pieces that
are played in an improvised fashion, and you may find
notes not conforming to measure lines, odd divisions of
the parts played in the left and right hand, and other
such features that do not match what is shown in the
notation.
television connected to the KR.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <Ext Display>.
A screen like the following appears.
fig.d-extdisp.eps_50
• Neither the external display nor the television will be
able to display properly if both are connected at the
same time.
Lyric Color
Selects the color used for lyric in the display.
Value: White, Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Cyan,
Magenta
Device
If you find that the image quality of the television is poor,
try switching the television format.
4. Touch the parameter
to make the settings.
Value: VGA, PAL, NTSC
5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Function screen.
■ Explanation of Each Items
Mode
Settings
Explanation
Value
The display of notations, lyrics, notation
Auto
+ keyboard, and lyric are switched
automatically.
Screens are shown the same way they
appear in the KR107’s display.
Panel
The Notation screen is normally
displayed.
Notation
Notation +
Keyboard
The notation and keyboard are displayed.
The Lyrics screen is normally displayed.
However, lyrics are displayed only when
playing back music files that contains
lyrics data.
Lyric
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
While V-LINK is switched on, no sound is produced
when you press any of the twelve keys at the left end of
the keyboard.
Connecting Video Equipment
(V-LINK)
5. Touch <OFF> to cancel the V-LINK function.
Connecting the KR107 to a V-LINK compatible image device
allows you to control the images with the KR107.
V-LINK (
) is functionality promoted by Roland
that allows linked performance of music and visual material.
By using V-LINK-compatible video equipment, visual effects
can be easily liked to, and made part of the expressive
elements of a performance.
921
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Connection Examples:
fig.02-
V-LINK compatible image device
USB MIDI Interface
MIDI OUT
KR107
■ Using the V-LINK function
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <V-LINK>.
4. Touch <ON>.
Switches to Image Control mode.
You can control images using the twelve keys at the left
end of the keyboard.
When V-LINK is on, “V-LINK” is indicated in the Basic
screen and other screens.
fig.V-LINKkey
A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1
A0 – G1#
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
■ Making the Connections
Connecting MIDI Devices
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging
performance data, you can control one device from the other.
For instance, you can output sound from the other
instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
the device you’re about to connect.
What’s MIDI?
MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was
developed as a universal standard for the exchange of
performance data between electronic instruments and
computers.
2. Switch off the power to the KR and the device you’re
about to connect.
3. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI
connectors to each other.
The KR is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange
performance data with external devices. These connectors
can be used to connect the KR to an external device for even
Please refer to the connection examples below.
4. Switch on the power to the KR and the connected
greater versatility.
984
device.
*
A separate publication titled “MIDI Implementation” is also
available. It provides complete details concerning the way
MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require
this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-
level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service
Center or authorized Roland distributor.
5. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected
device.
6. You should also set the MIDI settings as needed.
For details on the MIDI-related settings, refer to
p. 161–p. 163.
Connection Examples:
■ Connectors
Setup with a MIDI Sequencer
fig.09-10
fig.09-
Roland MT Series
Out
MIDI
In
MIDI Out Connector
Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
KR107
Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a
pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI
connector.
*
When the KR is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to Local
OFF. Refer to “Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator
and Keyboard (Local Control)” (p. 162).
MIDI In Connector
Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module
This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external
MIDI devices. The KR receiving MIDI messages can output
sounds, exchange tones and perform other operations.
fig.09-
Sound Module
MIDI
THRU
OUT
IN
*
External MIDI devices can’t be used for remotely changing the
Tones played by the KR’s keyboard.
KR107
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
Performing in Ensemble with
MIDI Instruments
(MIDI Ensemble)
MIDI Settings
You can make MIDI settings like those described below.
<MIDI Setting>
fig.09-04.eps
You can connect an electronic percussion device or other
MIDI instrument to the KR’s MIDI In connector for ensemble
playing. Making the MIDI settings for the instrument
connected to the MIDI In connector is easy. The sounds from
the connected MIDI instrument are played from the KR’s
speaker.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <MIDI Ensemble>.
Display
Explanation
A screen like the following appears.
fig.09-04.eps
Chooses the MIDI send channel
(p. 162).
Tx Channel
Switches Local Control on or off
(p. 162).
Local Control
<Program Change>
fig.09-04.eps
4. Select the method for using the MIDI In connector.
Displayed
Meaning
Normal setting.
Normal
Make changes in Tone and other settings
from the connected device.
Select this when you have percussion pads
connected to the KR’s MIDI In connector.
You do not need to make any MIDI settings
on the KR. Select pad Tones and make other
settings from the connected pads (for further
details, refer to the Owner’s Manual
provided with the pads).
Display
Explanation
Pad
Sends Bank Select MSB messages
(p. 163).
Bank Select MSB
Sends Bank Select LSB messages
(p. 163).
Bank Select LSB
Program Change
Select this when you have a keyboard
connected to the KR’s MIDI In connector.
You can select tones for the connected
keyboard from the KR. No MIDI settings
need be made on the KR.
Sends Program Change messages
(Program Numbers) (p. 163).
Keyboard
5. When “Keyboard” is selected in Step 4 above, use
to select the Tone.
The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
Local On: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
Making the Settings
connected.
fig.09-
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
Sound is emitted
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>.
Sound Generator
4. Touch
to make the setting for each
Local On
item.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.
Local Off: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
■ Selecting the Transmit Channel
separated. No sound will be produced by the
(Tx Channel)
keyboard when it is played.
MIDI organizes things into “channels,” which are numbered
from 1 through 16. Simply connecting a cable is not enough
for communication to take place. The connected devices must
be set to use the same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound
will be produced, and no sounds can be selected.
fig.09-
No sound produced
Sound Generator
Select the transmit channel (1–16) of the KR.
Local Off
The channel setting is at “1” when the KR is powered up.
If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections,
messages from the left-hand section are fixed at “3.”
→ When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you don’t
need to switch off Local Control. MT units transmit Local Off
messages when their power is switched on. First turn on the
power to the KR107, then after a few moments, play a note on
the KR107; when you turn on the power to the MT Series
device, Local Off is automatically enabled for the KR107.
The KR receives messages on all channels from 1 through 16.
■ Disconnecting the Internal
Sound Generator and
Keyboard (Local Control)
When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to
“OFF.” The setting is at “Local Control ON” when the KR is
powered up.
As illustrated, information describing what has been played
on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two
different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping
or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening,
route (1) must be disabled, by setting the unit to what is
known as “Local Off.”
fig.09-
Local On
(1)
Sequencer
Memory
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Sound
Generator
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Soft Tru On
(2)
Each note played is sounded twice
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
■ Sending Tone Change Messages
(Program Change/Bank Select
MSB/Bank Select LSB)
A Program Change is a message that means “change to the
Tone of the specified number.” The device that receives this
changes to the Tone of the corresponding number.
Connecting to Audio
Equipment
When you connect the KR to audio equipment, you can play
the sounds from the KR through the speakers on the audio
equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder
or other recording device.
When you choose a Program Change message (Program
Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the
MIDI device connected to the KR. The MIDI device that
receives the Program Number changes the tone to the
corresponding Program Number.
When connecting, please use audio cables (sold separately)
with standard phone plugs.
■ Connectors
fig.09-
Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available.
Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones.
With such devices, the Tone is selected through a
combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select
messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the
MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0–127) and the LSB
(Controller 32, with a value of 0–127).
Output Jacks
You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold
separately) and play the sounds from the KR through the
speakers on the connected equipment, or record your
performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.
*
Some MIDI instruments can’t handle Bank Select messages.
Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB
part.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
Input Jacks
You can connect another sound source, such as audio
equipment or an electronic instrument, using audio cables
(sold separately). Play the sounds from the connected device
through the speakers on the KR.
Sending Recorded
Performance Data to a MIDI
Device (Composer MIDI Out)
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
When Composer Out is active, you can send performance
data recorded with the KR to a connected MIDI device or
computer.
*
You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected
sound generating device.
When you turn on the power, this is set to “OFF” (data is not
sent).
926a
*
When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume
level of equipment connected to the inputs jacks may be low. If
this happens, use connection cables that do not contain
resistors, such as those from the Roland PCS series.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
2. Touch <Composer MIDI Out>.
fig.09-04.eps
3. Touch
to set ON or OFF.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the
Speakers on the KR
fig.09-
■ Making the Connections
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Output R/L
(Line Out)
Playing Sounds from the KR Through the Speakers
on Audio Equipment or Recording Your
Performances on a Recording Device
fig.09-
KR107
Input R/L
(Line In, Aux In)
KR107
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
the device you’re about to connect.
2. Turn off the power to the KR and other connected
equipment.
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
connection.
the device you’re about to connect.
4. Turn on the connected equipment.
5. Turn on the KR.
2. Turn off the power to the KR and other connected
equipment.
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
device.
connection.
4. Switch on the KR.
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
5. Switch on the connected device.
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
the device you’re about to connect.
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected
device.
2. Turn off the KR.
3. Turn off the connected equipment.
Recording KR Performances on a Recording Device
7. Start recording with the connected device.
8. Play the keyboard.
9. When the performance ends, stop recording on the
connected equipment.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
■ Connect to the USB Connector
Connecting a Computer
You can connect you computer with a USB cable to the USB
connector, located on the left underside of the KR107, and
exchange MIDI data between the instrument and the
computer. You can use the KR to play SMF data created with
the computer and exchange performance data in the same
manner as with MIDI devices connected to the MIDI
connectors.
■ Connect to the MIDI Connectors
You can use a USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately) to
connect the KR to your computer.
If the KR is connected to a computer in which sequencer
software such as Roland’s “Visual MT” is installed, a song
you’ve recorded on the KR can be saved on your computer.
Connecting your computer to the KR107 for the first time requires
installation of the “USB Driver” (on the included CD-ROM) to the
computer.
Connection Examples
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on
your system and on the other programs you are using. Be sure to
read the Readme file on the CD-ROM before installation.
*
In order to make connections to your computer, you must
install “MIDI driver” software on your computer. For details,
refer to the owner’s manual for your MIDI interface.
Windows XP/2000
→ \W2kXP\Readme_E.htm
Windows Me/98/98SE
→ \W98Me\Readme_E.htm
Mac OS X
Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB
connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of
the KR.
→ \Driver (Mac OS X)\Readme_e.htm
fig.comp.e
Bottom left of the KR
*
*
Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB.
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices,
always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices
before making any connections.
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
*
*
USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland dealer if you need
to purchase.
USB Connector
of your Computer
Turn on the power to the KR107 before starting up MIDI applications
on the computer. Do not turn the KR107 on or off while any MIDI
application is running.
Computer
USB MIDI Interface
*
*
If not using USB, disconnect the USB cable from the KR107.
If during the transmission/reception of data, the computer switches to
energy-saving mode or suspended mode, or if the KR107’s power is
switched on or off, the computer may freeze, or the KR107’s operation
may become unstable.
*
Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn off the power
during the transmission/reception of data.
For more on system requirements, refer to the “USB
Installation Guide.” However, note that the KR107 is
not compatible with Mac OS 9.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices
Connection examples
fig.comp.e
Bottom left of the KR
USB connector
USB Connector
of your Computer
Computer
1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the computer.
2. Start up the computer.
3. Connect the KR107 and the computer with a USB cable.
4. Turn on the power to the KR107.
→ Refer to the owner’s manual that came with your computer
■ Making the Settings for the
USB Driver
This sets the USB driver used when you have a computer
connected to the USB connector.
1. Open the Basic screen or press the One Touch [Piano]
button.
2. Touch the [Option] button.
3. Touch <USB Driver>.
4. Touch
to select the driver type.
Indication
Description
Select this when using the supplied
driver with a USB connection.
Under ordinary circumstances, use this
mode.
Original
This is an auxiliary mode.
It is not normally used.
Original 2
Generic
Select this when using a generic USB
driver included with the OS with a USB
connection.
5. After changing the settings, turn the power off, then on
again.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
If you think there’s a problem, read this first.
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
Screen on connected display or television
doesn’t look right
The power doesn’t
come on
Is the power cord connected and plugged
in correctly? (p. 17)
Is the external display properly connected (p.
156)?
The button doesn’t
work
Is the panel locked? (p. 153)
Turn the power off, then back on.
Is the external display’s power turned on?
may not be displayed when the ambient
temperature is below freezing.
Nothing appears
on screen
Are you using a display that is compatible
with the KR?
Refer to “Displays That Can Be Connected
to This Instrument” (p. 156).
Vertical lines
appear in the
screen/Color is
“washed out” at the
edges of the
screen
These occur due to the nature of a liquid
adjusting the brightness of the screen (p.
20).
Images not shown
Do you have a television and external
display connected at the same time?
on external display
when external
display is
connected
Follow the instructions in “Selecting
Images To Be Shown on the KR and
External Displays (User Image Display)”
(p. 147) to set the “External Display” image.
Also refer to “Changing the Settings for
Showing Images with the External Display
and the Television (External Display)” (p.
158).
The positioning of the touch screen may
become displaced if some time has passed
since it was last used. Take a look at
“Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch
The touch screen
doesn’t respond
correctly
Make sure the pedal cord extending from
the stand is securely connected to the pedal
connector on the rear of the unit (p. 17).
While narrow horizontal lines may be
visible in the television screen, this is a
particular characteristic of the television set
and does not indicate any problem with the
KR107.
Thin horizontal
Depressing a
Has a different function been assigned to
the pedal?
See “Assigning Functions to Pedals and
Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User
Functions)” (p. 144).
lines visible in the
television screen
pedal has no
effect, or the pedal
effect doesn’t stop
Even when all recommended settings are
used, images may still not be displayed
well with the television set you are using
(images may not match the screen size, and
may be clustered towards the center of the
screen).
Poor-quality of
images displayed
in television
Normal pedal operation is automatically
enabled when the One Touch Program
[Piano] button is pressed (p. 19).
Could you be using a connection cable that
contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not
contain a resistor.
926b
The volume level
of the instrument
connected to Input
jacks is too low
No sound is heard
Is the volume level of the KR (p. 19) or
connected device turned all the way down?
Unable to read
from/write to
Are you using (optional) Roland memory?
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed
Are headphones plugged in? (p. 19)
Has a plug remained connected to the
Phones jack?
the keyboard’s speaker stops playing.
external memory
Do you have different external devices
plugged into different power outlets?
When connecting external devices, always
draw power from the same outlet.
Low hum coming
from external
device
Has the Balance knob been moved all the
way to the right or left?
Has the volume been set to “0” using the
Part Balance? (p. 63)
No sound is heard
No data from the remote control is received
when the Remote Sensor is switched off.
Check “Switching the Remote Sensor On
and Off (iR function)” (p. 150).
Remote Control
not functioning
Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the
minimum level? (p. 34)
Has the footage been adjusted so that all
frequency components aren’t sounded? (p.
15 in the Quick Start)
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
Is the speaker cable connected and plugged
in correctly?
changing the Music Style automatically
changes the Tones and tempo of the upper
part of the keyboard to match the new
Music Style. If you want to change only the
Music Style without also altering the tempo
and Tone, check out “Changing Music
Styles Without Changing the Tone or
Tempo (One Touch Setting)” (p. 139).
No sound from the left side is V-LINK
When V-LINK is switched on, the twelve
keys at the left end of the keyboard are used
to control images, and no sounds are
played with these keys.
No sound is heard
The Tone has
changed
Have all devices been switched on?
When a performance made along with a
Music Files tune has been recorded,
recording the performance to button [1/
Whole] may make the Tones for buttons [3/
Lower] and [4/Upper] change as well.
No sound is heard
(when a MIDI
instrument is
connected)
Are the MIDI cables connected correctly?
(p. 160)
Does the MIDI channel match the
connected instrument? (p. 162)
Since the KR’s piano sounds faithfully
reproduce the sense of spaciousness and
reverberation of an actual acoustic piano’s
sound, a certain amount of reverberation is
still perceptible, even with the reverb effect
deactivated.
Has Local Control been set to “Off”?
When Local Control is set to Off, no sound
is produced by playing the keyboard.
Set Local Control to On (p. 162).
No sound is heard
when the keyboard
is played
Reverberation still
audible even with
Reverb turned off
The maximum number of notes can play
simultaneously is 128. Frequent use of the
damper pedal during automatic
accompaniment or when playing along
with a song on external memory may result
in performance data with too many notes,
causing some notes to drop out.
Have you made the correct Advanced 3D
settings for use with headphones?
Changing the Advanced 3D “Mode” to
“Headphones” or “Auto” and connecting a
pair of headphones configures the settings
for use with headphones.
Not all played
Sound from the
Output jacks is not
right
notes are sounded
On an acoustic piano, notes in the upper
one and a half octaves of the keyboard
continue to sound until they decay
naturally, regardless of the damper pedal.
There is a difference in the timbre as well.
Roland pianos faithfully simulate such
characteristics of the acoustic piano. The
range that is unaffected by the damper
pedal will change depending on the Key
Transpose setting.
The sound is strange
In the upper range,
abruptly beyond a
certain key
Is the KR in layer play? (p. 26)
Sounds are heard
twice (doubled)
when the keyboard
is played
When the KR is connected to an external
sequencer, set it to the Local OFF mode
(p. 162). Alternatively, the sequencer could
be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF.
Have you set transpose? (p. 88)
When listening through headphones:
Some of the more flamboyant and
The tuning or pitch
of the keyboard or
song is off
Are the settings for the “Temperament”
and “Stretch Tuning” correct? (p. 143)
effervescent piano tones feature an ample
high-end component, which may make the
sound appear to have metallic reverberation
added. Since this reverberation becomes
particularly audible when supplemented by
heavy reverb, you may be able to diminish
the problem by reducing the amount of
reverb applied to the sound.
When listening through speakers:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance
produced by the KR) would be suspect.
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest
Roland Service Center.
Is the setting for the “Master Tune” correct?
(p. 146)
If different effects have been selected for
the upper, lower, Layer, and other Tones,
and the effects for the Parts don’t match,
It’s not possible to apply more than one
effect at the same time, so when a
performance has been recorded on multiple
tracks or when playing along with a song as
it’s played back, the desired effect may not
be applied.
A High-pitched
whine is produced
Effects cannot be
applied to Tones
Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been
changed? (p. 139)
Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may
be sounded continuously.
A note doesn’t stop
playing
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
When listening through speakers:
Playing at loud volumes may cause
instruments near the KR to resonate.
Resonation can also occur with fluorescent
light tubes, glass doors, and other objects.
In particular, this problem occurs more
easily when the bass component is
increased, and when the sound is played at
higher volumes. Use the following
measures to suppress such resonance.
• Place speakers so they are 10–15 cm from
walls and other surfaces.
• Reduce the volume.
• Move the speakers away from any
resonating objects.
When listening through headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance
produced by the KR) would be suspect.
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest
Roland Service Center.
Is the light for the Track button
extinguished? (p. 84)
If the button light is out, the music on that
track is not heard. Press the track button so
the light is illuminated.
Only the sound of a
particular
instrument in a
song does not play
Have song settings been changed for each
Part on the 16-Track sequencer screen (p.
115)?
The bass range
sounds odd, or
there is a vibrating
resonance
Some music files may contain settings that
stop play at a point partway through the
Pressing the [
(Reset)] button
doesn’t return to
the beginning of
the song
song. Press the [
(Reset)] button several
times more to return to the beginning of the
tune.
Has a Marker placed in the song? (p. 85)
The fast-forward and reverse buttons are
ignored while music files is being read in.
Wait until processing finishes.
The [
and [
(Fwd)]
(Bwd)]
If you attempt to play back performance
data that contains more data than the entire
capacity of the KR’s memory, you may find
that operations other than playback (such
as rewind or fast forward) become
unavailable.
buttons don’t work
The automatic accompaniment doesn’t play
correctly
Press the [Exit] button several times to
return to the Basic screen (p. 21), and then
select a tone or Music Style.
Can’t select a tone
There are two types of SMF music files:
format 0 and format 1. If the song uses SMF
format 1 data, there will be a slight delay
until playback starts. Refer to the booklet
that came with the music files you’re using
to determine the format type.
or Music Style
There is a slight
delay before
Has the Balance knob been moved all the
playback of a song
on external
Have you pressed the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button?
memory starts
Automatic
With some music files, the lyrics cannot be
displayed correctly.
accompaniment is
not heard
If the One Touch Program [Arranger]
button has not been pressed, only the
rhythm pattern is played (p. 54).
If you press a button while the lyrics are
being shown in the display, the lyrics will
disappear. To recall them, touch
Is the 16-track Sequencer screen displayed?
(p. 114)
Lyrics are not
indicated properly
in the display
<
> in the Piano or Basic screen, or
Has Chord Intelligence been set to manual?
(p. 139)
press the [
Chord Intelligence
can’t be used
Is the setting for “Piano Style Arranger”
active? (p. 62)
In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes
could extend beyond the edges of the
screen, and not be displayed.
In certain cases, such as when playing
accompaniment may lag when excessive
amounts of performance data are used.
Accompaniment
tempo becomes
unstable
performance data, notes will not be
displayed in the notation. Change the part
that is displayed (p. 76).
The notation screen feature is particularly
unsuitable for the display of difficult,
complex musical works that demand
accurate notation. Refer to “Notes
Notation is not
indicated properly
in the display
Song doesn’t play back correctly
Does the screen indicate message, like “OK
to delete song?” (p. 90)
Regarding the Notation Display” (p. 74).
Song doesn’t play
back
The internal songs cannot be played back
while recorded performance data remains
in the KR’s memory. Try playing back the
song after deleting the performance data.
In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes
could extend beyond the edges of the
screen, and not be displayed.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
of information is being displayed or when a
large amount of data is displayed at one
time. Change the notation display settings as
described below (p. 76).
Any performance that has been recorded is
deleted when the power to the KR is turned
off or a song is selected. A performance
cannot be restored once it’s been deleted.
Be sure to save it on an external memory or
User Memory before you turn off the
power
Movement of
notation or
The recorded
performance has
disappeared
keyboard display
not smooth
- Set “Bouncing Ball” to “Off”
- Set “Color Notation” to “Off”
- Set “Keyboard” to “Off”
(p. 102).
- Set “External Display (p. 158)” to “Panel”
In certain cases, such as when playing
songs on external memories, the song may
lag when excessive amounts of
Song becomes
unstable
performance data are used.
Unable to play
back internal
songs
Have you pressed the remote control’s
[MUTE] button, muting the sound?
The KR107 can play back audio files in the
following format.
• “.WAV” extension
Unable to play
back audio files
• 16bit linear
• Sampling rate of “44.1 kHz”
• Stereo
Can’t record
Has one of the track buttons for recording
been selected? (p. 96)
Has the setting for “Punch-in Recording”
(p. 119) or “Tempo Recording” (p. 128)
been made?
Select the replace recording method (p.
118).
Can’t record
It is not possible to record while the
notation is being generated. Once the unit
has finished generating the notation (i.e.,
when the measure number in the screen is
no longer highlighted), try the operation
once again.
You cannot overdub with audio files.
If you select an internal song in which the
tempo changes during the song, and then
record, the tempo will change in the same
way for the performances that are recorded
on the other tracks. The tempo of the
metronome will also change in the same
way.
Tempo of recorded
song or
metronome is off
If you record additional material without
erasing the previously recorded song, the
song will be recorded at the first-recorded
tempo. Please erase the previously
recorded song before you re-record (p. 97).
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Indication
Meaning
Error 01:
Error 02:
You can only read the music file. It can not be saved.
An error occurred during writing. The storage media’s protect tab may be in the “Protect” (writing
prohibited) position, or the storage media may not yet be initialized.
No storage media is inserted.
Insert the storage media and try again.
Error 10:
Error 11:
Error 14:
Error 15:
There is not sufficient free memory in the save destination.
Either insert other storage media or delete unneeded files and try again.
An error occurred during writing. The storage media may be corrupted.
The file is unreadable.
The data format is not compatible with the KR107.
Data was not called up in time for playback of the song.
Error 16:
After waiting several seconds, you may be able to play back the song by pressing the [
] button again.
The selected image data cannot be displayed.
Prepare image data that can be used with the KR107 (p. 147).
Error 17:
Error 30:
Error 40:
The internal memory capacity of the KR107 is full.
The KR107 cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device.
Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the KR107.
A MIDI cable has been disconnected.
Connect it properly and securely.
Error 41:
Error 43:
A MIDI transmission error has occurred.
Check the MIDI cable and connected MIDI device.
There may be a problem with the system.
Error 51:
Error 65:
Repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it is not solved after you have tried several times, contact the
Roland service center.
The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current.
Check the storage media to confirm that no damage has occurred to it.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
Ballad Bells
Bell Monitor
Timeline
Fretless Bs.
Nylon Guitar
Requint Gtr
EX Ac.Guitar
Steel-str.Gt
12-str.Gt
Steel + Body
Nylon+Steel
EX A.Guitar3
Steel Vox
Slow Strings
SlowStrings2
Legato Str
Warm Strings
Sahara Str
Decay Str2
Tremolo Str
Orchestra
Orchestra 2
Farewell
French Horns
French Horn2
OrchestraBrs
Brass 1
[Piano]
NaturalGrand
Vintage EP
FM E.Piano
Natural Hps.
Vibraphone
Ariel Piano
Natural Gnd2
Honky-tonk
'60sE.Piano1
Phase Clav.2
Morning Lite
Jazzy Vib+Gt
Piano Str2
Piano Oohs
Rock Piano
NaturalMello
Stage EP
Stage Phazer
Vibrations
Vibra Bells
Brass 2
BrassSection
PowerBrass
Pop Orch
Contemp'Orch
Brass sfz
[Organ]
ChurchOrgan1
Combo Jz.Org
Ballad Organ
German Acco.
Blues Harp
Ukulele
Hawaiian Gt
Clean Gt.
Choir Str
Brass Fall
Bell Strings
Pearly Harp
Harp
St. Harp
Viola
Contrabass
Santur
Yang Qin
Yang Qin 2
Er Hu
Trumpet Fall
EX Alto Sax
AltoSax + Tp
Alto Sax
L-Organ
Jazz Organ1
Masked Opera
Grand Pipe
Theater Org.
La Seine
ParisRomance
Mellow Bars
Organ 1
JC Clean Gt.
Mid Tone GTR
TC Rear Pick
Acid Guitar
Open Hard
Feedback Gt.
Power Guitar
Guitar Pinch
Mystic Gtr
Grow Sax
BreathyTenor
Tenor Sax
Tenor Sax 2
Tenor Sax f
Tenor Sax B
Baritone Sax
English Horn
Bassoon
Piccolo
Flute 2
Recorder
Bottle Blow
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Ocarina
Bagpipe
Lochscape
Andes Mood
HimalayaPipe
Wide SynBrss
DeepSynBrass
Jump Brass
Saw Brass1
Saw Brass2
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass2
DetuneSawBrs
Pro Brass
Organ 2
Celesta
Marimba
Xylophone
NaturalC.Hps
Clav.
Soft Pad
Lower Organ1
Trem. Organ
'70s E.Organ
'60s Organ
Funk Gt.
Funk Gt.2
Muted Gt.
Soft Pad 2
Syn.Strings1
Syn.Strings2
Syn.Slow Str
OB Strings
JP Saw Str
Timpani
Warm JP Str
OrchestraHit
Good Old Hit
Euro Hit
6th Hit
Bass Hit
Philly Hit
Philly Hit 2
Mix Hit 1
Muted Dis.Gt
Rock Rhythm
Dist Rtm GTR
Wah Brush Gt
Wood Bass
W.Bass+Ride
Rockabilly
Finger Slap
Mr.Smooth
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
Synth Bass 1
Jungle Bass
Hammer
SynthBass101
ResoSH Bass
Acid Bass
Clavi Bass
Synth Bass 2
Beef FM Bass
Attack Pulse
Rubber Bass
Sitar
Jazz Organ2
Jazz Organ3
Jazz Organ4
Chorus Organ
Perc. Organ
Rock Organ1
Rotary Organ
Rotary Org.S
Rotary Org.F
ChurchOrgan2
Pipe Organ
Trem.Flute
Organ Flute
Nason flt 8'
Organ Bass
Pipe Org. Bs
Digi Church
VS Organ
Music Box
Glockenspiel
Grand Piano1
Grand Piano2
MellowPiano1
PianoStrings
Bright Piano
DetunedPiano
Honky-tonk 2
MellowPiano2
PianoKidsCho
Air Grand
Ballad Piano
UprightPiano
Mono Piano
FM+SA EP
MIDI Piano1
EG+E.Piano 1
EG+E.Piano 2
Bell Piano
Mix Hit 2
[Sax/Brass]
BlowAltoVib
PowerBrass 2
Sax Section
Flute
Good Old Day
Brass Sect 2
EX Tp&Shake
Super Tenor
AltoSax Soft
Soprano Sax
Clarinet
Metalic Org.
CheeseOrgan
Accordion Fr
AccordionFr2
Accordion It
Bright Acco.
Soft Acco.
SynBrass sfz
E. Grand
[Voice]
Aerial Choir
Jazz Scat
Mild E.Grand
Soft E.Piano
Phase EP
Sitar 2
Banjo
Shamisen
Koto
Kid's Choir
Dreaming Box
Rich Choir
Angels Choir
Boys Choir
Opera Voice
Mellow Choir
Holy Voices
Mystic Str
E.Piano 1
Bandoneon
Harmonica
Pop E.Piano
Tremolo EP
'60sE.Piano2
E.Piano 2
EP Phase
St.FM EP
EP Legend
Harpsichord
Coupled Hps.
Harpsichord2
Comp Clav.
Reso Clav.
Phase Clav.
Pulse Clav
Celesta 2
Soft Marimba
Vibe Tr.
Marimba Tr.
Kalimba
Taisho Koto
Oboe
EX Trumpet
Flugel Horn
Pan Flute
[Guitar / Bass]
[Strings]
DolceStrings
Velo Strings
Dolce Qrt
Lunar Strngs
R&B SoftPad
Wind & Str
Aerial Harp
Violin
EX Nylon Gtr
EX Steel Gt.
Jazz Guitar2
Fl.Gtr Roll
Qu Di
SuperF.Horns
Angel Pipes
Trumpet
Tp Shake
Bright Tp.
Trancy X
Mandolin
HPF Slicer
Side Band X
Glasswaves
Church Choir
Voice Oohs
Voice Oohs 2
Choir Hahs
Decay Choir
Doos Voice
Doot Accent
Dat Accent
Bap Accent
Thum Voice
Humming
JC Chorus Gt
TC Clean ff
Overdrive Gt
DistortionGt
Amore Story
EX A.Guitar2
Uncle Martin
Flamenco Gtr
Jazz Guitar
Wild Ac.Bs
Warm Tp.
Cello
Dark Trumpet
Romantic Tp
Trombone
Trombone 2
Twin bones
Bones Sect.
Bright Tb.
Harp Strings
Mellow Str
EX Orchestra
Slow Violin
PizzicatoStr
Strings
Oct Strings
Strings 2
DecayStrings
Bright Str
Music Box 2
Music Bell
Music Bell 2
Tubular-bell
Church Bell
A.Bass+Cymbl
Acoustic Bs.
Fingered Bs.
Picked Bass
Tuba
MutedTrumpet
MuteTrumpet2
MuteTrumpet3
SynVox
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
Analog Voice
InfinitePhsr
X Super Saws
Fat Stacks
Frgile Saws
SuperSawSlow
Electrostars
Bending Logo
2600 Sine
Square Wave
Mg Square
JP8 Square
LM Square
Syn.Square
CC Solo
Warm SquPad
Voyager
Film Cue
HumanKindnes
Bowed Glass
Metal Pad
Orbiting
Glockenspiel
Music Box
Vibraphone
Vibe.w
Choir
Pop Voice
SynVox
OrchestraHit
Trumpet
Trombone
Trombone 2
Tuba
MutedTrumpet
French Horns
French Horn2
Brass 1
Fiddle
Shanai
Tinkle Bell
Agogo
Steel Drums
Woodblock
Castanets
Taiko
Concert BD
Melo. Tom 1
Melo. Tom 2
Synth Drum
808 Tom
Elec Perc.
Reverse Cym.
Gt.FretNoise
Gt.Cut Noise
String Slap
Breath Noise
Fl.Key Click
Seashore
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Bird
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Bird 2
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
DoorCreaking
Door
Marimba
Marimba w
Xylophone
Tubular-bell
Church Bell
Carillon
Santur
Organ 1
Organ 2
Visionary
Halo Pad
JP8 Sqr Pad
Vox Sweep
Consolament
JP-8 Phase
Sweep Pad
Sweep Pad 2
Ice Rain
Clavi Pad
Toy Box
Soundtrack
Crystal
Syn Mallet
ChristmasBel
Clear Bells
Himalaya Ice
Glittery Pad
Atmosphere
Harpvox
Nylon Harp
Nylon + EP
HollowReleas
Tubulence
Landing Pad
Shangri-La
Motion Pad
Brightness
Org Bells
Brass 2
Pop Organ 1
Detuned Or.1
Detuned Or.2
Church Org.1
Church Org.2
Church Org.3
Full Organ
Jazz Organ1
Rock Organ
Reed Organ
Accordion Fr
Accordion It
Harmonica
Bandoneon
Nylon-str.Gt
Nylon Gt.2
Nylon Gt.o
Ukulele
Steel-str.Gt
12-str.Gt
Mandolin
Jazz Guitar
Hawaiian Gt
Clean Gt.
Chorus Gt.
Muted Gt.
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass2
Synth Brass3
Synth Brass4
AnalogBrass1
AnalogBrass2
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
Tenor Sax
Baritone Sax
Oboe
English Horn
Bassoon
Sleeper
Dual Sqr&Saw
Jupiter Lead
Sinetific
FM Lead 1
FM Lead 2
Saw Wave
Saw
Doctor Solo
Mg Lead
P5 Saw Lead
JP SuperSaw
Rhythmic Saw
Natural Lead
SequencedSaw
Waspy Synth
Velo SawLead
Attack Lead
DelyResoSaws
Wezcoast
Syn.Calliope
JP8 Pulse
LM PureLead
Orgaenia
Chiffer Lead
Cheese Saw
JP OctAttack
Charang
Reso Saw
Wire Lead
2600 SubOsc
Solo Vox
RAVE Vox
5th Saw Wave
Freeze Synth
Bass & Lead
Fat & Perky
Delayed Lead
Fantasia
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
Pan Flute
Bottle Blow
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Ocarina
Square Wave
Square
Sine Wave
Saw Wave
Saw
Doctor Solo
Syn.Calliope
Chiffer Lead
Charang
Scratch
Windchime
Helicopter
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Starship
Burst Noise
Applause
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Goblin
Saturn Siren
RandomEnding
Echo Drops
Echo Bell
Funk Gt.
Funk Gt.2
Echo Pan
Overdrive Gt
DistortionGt
Feedback Gt.
Gt.Harmonics
Gt. Feedback
Acoustic Bs.
Fingered Bs.
Picked Bs.
Fretless Bs.
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
SynthBass101
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Synth Bass 3
Synth Bass 4
Rubber Bass
Violin
Echo Pan 2
Big Panner
Ai-yai-a
Saturn Rings
Star Theme
Rising Osc
Galaxy Way
12th Planet
PolySweep Nz
En-co-re
Piano 1
Piano 1w
Piano 1d
Piano 2
Piano 2w
Piano 3
Piano 3w
Solo Vox
5th Saw Wave
Bass & Lead
Fantasia
Warm Pad
Polysynth
Space Voice
Bowed Glass
Metal Pad
Halo Pad
Sweep Pad
Ice Rain
Soundtrack
Crystal
Syn Mallet
Atmosphere
Brightness
Goblin
Fantasia 2
New Age Pad
New Age Pad2
Sugar Key
FreezinNight
New Year Day
Warm Pad
Sine Pad
Honky-tonk
Honky-tonk 2
E.Piano 1
Slow Violin
Viola
Cello
Nu Epic Pad
Hollow Pad
Decay Pad
Polysynth
P5 Poly
Poly King
Octave Stack
Hoovercraft
DOC Stack
Bustranza
Space Voice
Heaven II
E.Piano 2
Contrabass
Tremolo Str
PizzicatoStr
Harp
Timpani
Strings
Echo Drops
Echo Bell
Echo Pan
Star Theme
Sitar
Sitar 2
Banjo
Shamisen
Koto
Taisho Koto
Kalimba
'60s E.Piano
E.Piano 1v
E.Piano 2v
Detuned EP 1
Detuned EP 2
Harpsichord
Coupled Hps.
Harpsi.w
Orchestra
Slow Strings
Syn.Strings1
Syn.Strings2
Syn.Strings3
Choir Aahs
Harpsi.o
Clav.
Celesta
Bagpipe
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
instruments of the same number.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion
POP
ROCK
JAZZBRUSH
HIP HOP
VOX DRUM
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
Jungle BD 2
Metronome E.Click
Metronome Pi
Concert SD
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
R&B Snare
Rock Snare m 1
Rock Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Vox Dut
22
Rock Snare m 1
Rock Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Kick 2
Pop Kick 1
Pop Side Stick
Pop Snare s 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare s 2
Pop Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Pop Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Pop Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
Pop Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 2
Finger Snap 2
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap 2
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
25
27
Slap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jungle BD 2
HipHop BD1
TR-808 Rimshot
Power Snare 1A
TR-707 Clap
Power Snare 2A
Low Tom 2
Pop CHH 1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 2
Pop OHH
Rock Kick 2
Rock Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Vox Dom
Vox Tuush
Vox Hehho
Vox Doyear
Vox Thu!
Vox That
Vox Aahhh
Vox Tu
Vox Dooh
Vox Ptu
Vox Down
Vox Pa
Vox Bom
Vox Toear
Vox Aahhu
Vox Toya
Vox Thu
Vox Cheey
Vox Cymm
Vox Tub
Vox Pruru
Vox Tut
C2
37
39
Rock Side Stick
Rock Snare s 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Rock Snare s 2
Rock Low Tom f
Rock CHH 1
Rock Low Tom
Rock CHH 2
Rock Mid Tom f
Rock OHH
Rock Mid Tom
Rock High Tom f
Rock Crash Cymbal
Rock High Tom
Rock Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha CowBell
Chinees Cymbal
Vibra-slap
Pop Ride Cymbal 3
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
Jazz Snare Swing 1
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare Swing 2
Jazz Snare 2
Jazz Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Jazz Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Jazz Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Pop Mid Tom
Pop High Tom f
Jazz Mid Tom
Jazz High Tom f
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
C3 48
50
49
51
Pop Crash Cymbal 1
Pop High Tom
Pop Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha CowBell
Pop Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Pop Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
Jazz Crash Cymbal 1
Jazz High Tom
Jazz Ride Cymbal 1
Jazz Chinees Cymbal
Jazz Ride Cymbal 2
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha CowBell
Jazz Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Jazz Ride Cymbal 3
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
Crash Cymbal 3
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
52
53
54
56
58
Shake Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
55
57
Vox Tyun
Vox Tdum
59
Vox Afahhhh
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
C4 60
62
61
63
64
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
65
66
68
70
67
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
69
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
HipVibraslap
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
High Hoo
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
Low Hoo
79
Mute Triangle2
Open Triangle 2
Shaker
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
C6 84
86
85
87
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
HipHop SD 2
LoFi SD Rim
TR-808 Clap
Room Snare 1
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
----
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
----
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
----
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
----
89
90
92
94
91
93
Standard 1 Snare 2A
Room Snare 2
Standard 1 Snare 1
Standard 1 Snare 2B
----
----
----
----
----
95
96
98
C7
97
99
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
100
101
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
102
104
106
Bongo CowBell
----
Bongo CowBell
----
----
----
----
Bongo CowBell
----
Bongo CowBell
----
----
----
----
Bongo CowBell
----
Bongo CowBell
----
----
----
----
----
Bongo CowBell
----
Bongo CowBell
----
----
----
----
103
105
Tape Rewind
Phono Noise
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2A
Elec Snare 4A
Elec Snare 4B
107
108
C8
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
STD CHINA
STANDARD 1
STANDARD 2
STANDARD 3
ROOM
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
----
----
----
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
22
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
25
27
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 1 Kick 1
Standard 1 Kick 2
Side Stick 1
Standard 1 Snare 1
TR-909 Clap
Standard 1 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Close Hi-hat1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
----
----
----
Cana
Ban Gu 1
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 1 Kick 1
Standard 1 Kick 2
Side Stick 1
Standard 1 Snare 1
TR-909 Clap
Standard 1 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Close Hi-hat1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 2 Kick 2
Standard 2 Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Standard 2 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Standard 2 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 2
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 3 Kick 2
Standard 3 Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Standard 3 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Standard 3 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Room Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Room Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Room Snare 2
Room Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 4
Room Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Room Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 4
Room Mid Tom 1
Room High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Room High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
C2
37
39
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
C4 60
62
61
63
64
Taiko 1
Nao Bo
Taiko 2
Xiao Bo 1
Taiko 3
Open High HuYinLuo 2 [EXC8]
Taiko 4
65
66
68
70
[EXC8]
[EXC8]
67
69
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Taiko 5
Open High HuYinLuo 1
Taiko 6
Shou Luo 1
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Claves
High Wood Block
Claves
High Wood Block
Claves
High Wood Block
Claves
High Wood Block
76
Mute Low HuYinLuo 2
Shou Luo 2
Xiao Bo 2
Ban Gu 2
Xiao Bo 3
Open High HuYinLuo 3
Mute High HuYinLuo
Mute Low HuYinLuo 1
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
----
----
----
----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
Bar Chime
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
89
90
92
94
91
93
95
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
96
98
C7
97
99
Open Sagat
Close Sagat
Ban Gu 1
Ban Gu 3
----
100
101
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
ELECTRONIC
DANCE
POWER
TR-808/909
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
----
----
----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
22
25
27
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Elec Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
TR-808 Kick 2
HipHop BD1
Side Stick 2
Power Snare 2
TR-808 Clap
Elec Snare 3
Elec Low Tom 2
CR-78 CHH
Elec Low Tom 1
TR-808 CHH
Elec Mid Tom 2
CR-78 OHH
Elec Mid Tom 1
Elec High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Power Kick2
Power Kick1
Side Stick 2
Dance Snare1
TR-808 Clap
Power Snare 1
Power Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 4
Power Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Power Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 4
Power Mid Tom 1
Power High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Power High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
TR-909 Kick
TR-808 Kick
TR-808 Rimshot
TR-808 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
TR-909 Snare 1
TR-808 Low Tom 2
TR-808 CHH
TR-808 Low Tom 1
TR-808 CHH
TR-808 Mid Tom 2
TR-808 OHH
TR-808 Mid Tom 1
TR-808 High Tom 2
TR-808 Cymbal
TR-808 High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Elec Kick 1
C2
Side Stick 2
Elec Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Elec Snare 2
Elec Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Elec Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Elec Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Elec Mid Tom 1
Elec High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
37
39
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
TR-808 High Conga
TR-808 Mid Conga
TR-808 Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
TR-808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Cabasa
TR-808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
High Hoo
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
77
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
Low Hoo
79
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
C6 84
86
Castanets
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
■SFX Set
SFX Set
JAZZ
BRUSH
ORCHESTRA
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
25
27
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
Closed Hi-hat 3
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Ride Cymbal 1
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 1
Concert BD
Side Stick 2
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Jazz Snare 1
Hand Clap 3
Standard 2 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Low Tom 2
C2
-----
-----
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull
Sticks
37
39
[EXC7]
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Brush Closed Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Square Click
[EXC1]
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar sliding Finger
Guitar cutting noise (up)
Guitar cutting noise (down)
String slap of double bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
Applause
Door Creaking
Door
Brush Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 1
Brush Open Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Mid Tom 1
Brush High Tom 2
Brush Crash Cymbal
Brush High Tom 1
Brush Ride Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Brush Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Concert Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Concert Cymbal 1
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
C4 60
62
Scratch
61
63
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
64
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
Bubble
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
-----
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
C6 84
86
Cat
Bird
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
BabyLaughing
Boeeeen
Glass & Glam
Ice Ring
Crack Bottle
Pour Bottle
Car Horn
R.Crossing
SL 1
SL 2
Seal
Fancy Animal
Elephant
Bike
88
-----
-----
89
90
92
94
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
91
93
95
96
98
C7
97
99
100
101
-----
Small Club
-----
-----
-----
102
104
103
105
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects List
Effect Type
Equalizer
Explanation
Effect Type
Explanation
This is a four-band stereo equalizer (low, high).
This is a stereo spectrum.
A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect inde-
pendently to the low-frequency and high-frequen-
cy ranges.
2 Band Chorus
Spectrum
Enhancer
Adds sparkle and tightness to the sound.
The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary
speakers often used with the electric organs of the
past.
Adds a special effect to the sound by cutting the
volume in varying ranges.
Rotary
Isolator
Boosts the volume of the lower range, creating
powerful lows.
This type provides modified response for the rota-
ry speaker, with the low end boosted further.
Low Boost
High Pass Filter
Overdrive
Rotary2
This is a low-cut filter. It cuts the low-frequency
component.
It comprises vibrato/chorus, overdrive, and rotary
effects.
Rotary Multi
Stereo Delay1
Stereo Delay2
Stereo Delay3
Stereo Delay4
Stereo Delay5
Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced
by vacuum tube amplifiers.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one eighth note.
Produces a more intense distortion than Over-
drive.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one quarter-note triplet.
Distortion
Overdrive2
Distortion2
This is an overdrive that provides heavy distor-
tion.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one dotted eighth note.
This is a distortion effect that provides heavy dis-
tortion.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one quarter note.
Speaker
Simulator
Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used
to record the speaker sound.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
length of one half note.
Guitar Amp
Simulator
This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar
amplifier.
Monaural Delay This is a monaural delay.
Modulation
Delay
Adds modulation to the delayed sound.
A phase-shifted sound is added to the original
sound and modulated.
Phaser
Triple Tap Delay Produces three delay sounds; center, left and right.
Multi Stage
Phaser
Extremely high settings of the phase difference
produce a deep phaser effect.
3D Delay
This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound.
A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape
delay sound.
A phaser that continues raising/lowering the fre-
quency at which the sound is modulated.
Tape Echo
Infinite Phaser
This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and de-
layed sound to the input sound.
It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls
like a jet airplane taking off or landing.
Reverse Delay
Stereo Flanger
3D Flanger
This is an effect that intentionally degrades the
sound quality for creative purposes.
This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound.
Lo-Fi
A flanger that lets you apply an effect indepen-
dently to the low-frequency and high-frequency
ranges.
Telephone
Gate Reverb
This applies a telephone sound.
2Band Flanger
This is a special type of reverb in which the rever-
berant sound is cut off before its natural length.
Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in
timbre.
Auto Wah
Humanizer
Overdrive ->
Chorus
This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in
series.
Adds a vowel character to the sound, making it
similar to a human voice.
Overdrive ->
Flanger
This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in
series.
This is an effect that applies amplitude modulation
(AM) to the input signal, producing bell-like
sounds.
Ring Modulator
Overdrive ->
Delay
This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in se-
ries.
Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo
effect to the sound.
Distortion ->
Chorus
This effect connects an distortion and a chorus in
series.
Tremolo
Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the
sound.
Distortion ->
Flanger
This effect connects an distortion and a flanger in
series.
Auto Pan
By applying successive cuts to the sound, this ef-
fect turns a conventional sound into a sound that
appears to be played as a backing phrase.
Distortion ->
Delay
This effect connects an distortion and a delay in se-
ries.
Slicer
Enhancer ->
Chorus
This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in
series.
Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels,
smoothing out fluctuations in volume.
Compressor
Enhancer ->
Flanger
This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in
series.
Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume
level, preventing distortion from occurring.
Limiter
Enhancer ->
Delay
This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in se-
ries.
Stereo Chorus
This is a stereo chorus.
Uses a six-phase chorus (six layers of chorused
sound) to give richness and spatial spread to the
sound.
Chorus -> Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series.
Hexa Chorus
Flanger -> Delay This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series.
Chorus ->
Flanger
This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in se-
ries.
This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo (cyclic
modulation of volume).
Tremolo Chorus
On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper
pedal allows other strings to resonate in sympathy
with the notes you play, creating rich and spacious
resonances. This effect simulates these damper
resonances.
Space D
Produces a transparent chorus effect.
Damper
Resonance
3D Chorus
This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Style List
[Pop/Rock]
[Ballad/Acoustic]
[Oldies/Country]
[Gospel/Latin]
[Trad/World]
Pop
ModernBallad
'80s Ballad
AcoustBallad
AcoustEzLstn
UnpluggedPop
UnplugBallad
Adult Pop 1
Adult Pop 2
6/8 Ballad
Detroit Pop
'60s Rock'n
DreamSloRock
CountryRock1
CountryBald1
Groovin R&B
Oldies 1
Clock Rock'n
CountryPop 1
SwinginCntry
Soul
Latin Pop 1
Orch Bossa
Rhumba
GospelShuffl
ContPraise 1
ContPraise 2
Gospel
Samba
ModernChaCha
Salsa
Soft Gospel
Gospel Shout
AcoustRhumba
Acoust Samba
Trad Rhumba
Gospel Pop
GospelBallad
Latin Dance
Cha Cha
Trad Tango
SunshineBosa
Jazz Bossa
Merengue
Musical
'80s Pop 1
Funky Disco
AdultContemp
Uptown Rock
EZ Listening
Strumin'Away
'70s Disco 1
SmoothContmp
Simple Rock
'60s Feelin'
16Beat Pop
Light Pop
Bright Pop
Heart Beat
Easy Pop
'80s Pop 2
'80s Pop 3
Cute Pop
LovelyShuffl
'70s Disco 2
'70s Dance
Fever Dance
Euro Dance
Hard Tekno
Big House
'90s House
House Pop
Ibiza Dance
Cool Rap
Pub Boogie
Vienna Waltz
Kids Shuffle
Movie March
Music Hall
Orch Bolero
Orch Waltz
Holiday 1
Classic
Jing Ju
MarchingBand
March
Slow Waltz
Fast Waltz
Paris
Quiet Waltz
Holiday 2
Holiday 3
2 Beat
Lager Polka
Slow Polka
AustrianPolk
AustrianWalz
Irish
Tejano
Celtic
Musette
Scotland
Japan
Ireland
Paso Doble
China Pop
Jiang Nan
Xi Bei
SchlagerBeat
PartySchlagr
'70sSchlager
Disco Fox
Party Polka
RockSchlager
ShufflSchlgr
SimpleMarch1
SimpleMarch2
Simple Waltz
Kids 4/4
Love Beat
UnplugShuffl
CoolLiveBand
Night Ballad
GuitarShuffl
Euro Ballad
Guitar Trio
MidnightBald
Pop Ballad
Piano Pop
Love Songs
12/8 Ballad
Scat Ballad
'60s Ballad
Torch Song 1
Torch Song 2
Strings
Rock'n Slow
Oldies 2
CountryBald2
CountrySwing
Rock'n Fever
Country Beat
Slow Country
CountryRock2
Country Fox
Blues
R&B
Slow Dance
Twist
'60s Beach
Slow Oldies
Early Rock
Go Go Rock
Mersey Beat
CountryPop 2
Cajun
GuitarRhumba
Mambo
Fast Samba
Fast Bossa
Big Samba
Luv Bossa
Mid Bossa
Latin Pop 2
Reggae
Tango
Beguine
Oye Son
Revival
8BeatBallad1
8BeatBallad2
Fireside
Piano Ballad
Story Ballad
SimpleBallad
ClassicBalad
Symph Ballad
R.8-Beat 1
R.8-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 1
R.16-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 3
R.16-Beat 4
R.Afro&Swing
R.5BeatSwing
R.Shuffle 1
R.Waltz 1
R.March 1
R.5-Beat
R.7-Beat
P.Pop 1
P.Classic 1
P.Night
P.Bossa Nova
P.Ragtime
P.Classic 2
P.Ballad
Now Hip Hop
Twostep
HipHop Beat
Hip'n Hop
Country
Cntry Dreams
Charleston
Bluegrass
Easy Hop
MorningShffl
Groovy Pop
Smile Pop
Deep Country
Gospel Piano
Asian Rhumba
Warm Pop
Sunny Pop
Feel Good
US Groove
Steady Rock
Shuffle Rock
Dyno Rock
Power Rock
Heavy Rock
Thump Rock
Asian Pop
[Big Band/
Swing]
MidnitSloSwg
BigBand Slow
Big Band
BigBand Med
BigBand Fast
Medium Swing
Jive
Slow Swing
Quick Step
StringsSwing
Foxtrot
Kids 6/8
Kids
Kids Dance
Cinema 2Beat
Swing Fox
Fox Band
P.Swing Pop
P.Rock'nRoll
P.Concerto 1
P.Concerto 2
P.Swing
P.Shuffle
P.Boogie
P.'50s Rock
P.Latin
Gipsy Swing
Fast Swing
JzGuitrSwing
Jazz Waltz
Blue Boogie
BigBandBalad
'30s BigBand
Big Band 2
Jazz Ballad
LooseBigBand
Smooth Jazz
A Cappella
Scat Swing
Organ Swing
Dixieland
Hawaiian
Hula
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chord List
*
*
● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 49).
C
C#
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
Cmaj7
C7
C#maj7
C#7
Dmaj7
D7
maj7
7
Emaj7
E7
Fmaj7
F7
Cm
C#m
Dm
m
Em
Fm
Cm7
Cdim
C#m7
C#dim
Dm7
Ddim
m7
dim
Em7
Edim
Fm7
Fdim
Cm7 ( 5 )
C#m7 ( 5 )
C#aug
Dm7 ( 5 )
E
E
E
E
E
E
m7 ( 5 )
Em7 ( 5 )
Fm7 ( 5 )
Caug
Daug
aug
Eaug
Faug
Csus4
C7sus4
C6
C#sus4
C#7sus4
C#6
Dsus4
D7sus4
D6
sus4
7sus4
6
Esus4
E7sus4
E6
Fsus4
F7sus4
F6
Cm6
C#m6
Dm6
m6
Em6
Fm6
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chord List
*
*
● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 49).
F#
G
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F#maj7
F#7
Gmaj7
G7
maj7
7
Amaj7
A7
maj7
7
Bmaj7
B7
F#m
Gm
m
Am
m
Bm
F#m7
F#dim
F#m7 ( 5 )
F#aug
F#sus4
Gm7
Gdim
Gm7 ( 5 )
Gaug
Gsus4
m7
Am7
Adim
Am7 ( 5 )
Aaug
Asus4
m7
Bm7
Bdim
Bm7 ( 5 )
Baug
Bsus4
dim
dim
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
F#7sus4
F#6
G7sus4
G6
A
A
7sus4
6
A7sus4
A6
B
B
7sus4
6
B7sus4
B6
F#m6
Gm6
A
m6
Am6
B
m6
Bm6
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Song List
Folks
Kids
Classical
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Greensleeves
Entertainer
8
9
Joy To The World
Puppy’s March
→
Song files of this genre corresponds to
the included collection of printed music
entitled “Roland 60 Classical Piano
Masterpieces.”
Annie Laurie
Londonderry Air
Ave Maria
10 Frog Song
11 Little Fox
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Sonate No.15
12 Lightly Row
13 The Cuckoo
Liebestraume 3
Etude, op.10-3
Je te veux
Amazing Grace
Little Brown Jug
When The Saints Go Marchin’
In
EZ Classical
8
9
Valse, op.64-1
Golliwog’sCakewalk
FantaisieImpromptu
Arabesque 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
La Fille Aux Cheveux De Lin
La Campanell
Stagecoach
10 Hallelujah!
Eine Kleine Nachtmusik
Les patineurs, Valse
Divertimento
Blauen Donau
Jazzy
10 Auf Flugeln des Gesanges
11 Mazurka No.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fly Free
Impromptu, Op.90-2
Gnossienne 1
Secret Agent
12 Gymnopedie 1
Late Night Chopin
Blue Sky Rag
Die Lorelei
13 Etude, op.25-1
Brindisi
14 Clair de Lune
Preludelight
10 Air sul G
15 Etude, op.10-5
Sun Daze
11 FantaisieImpromptu
12 Grande Valse Brillante
13 Gymnopedie 1
14 Liebestraume 3
15 Mondschein
16 Dr.GradusAdParnassum
17 Grande Valse Brillante
18 La priere d’une Vierge
19 Course en Troika
20 To The Spring
Keepers Tale
Count On The Blues
One Down And Easy
10 A Prelude To ...
11 Bach’s A Boppin’
12 Kismet’s Salsa
16 Nocturne No.2
17 Valse, op.64-1
18 Prelude, op.28-15
19 Traumerei
21 Valse, op.64-2
22 Radetzky Marsch
23 Traumerei
13 From Matthew’s Passion
14 Roll Over Ludwig
24 Moments Musicaux 3
25 Prelude, op.28-15
26 Harmonious Blacksmith
27 Ungarische Tanze 5
28 Turkischer Marsch(Beethoven)
29 Nocturne No.2
20 Turkischer Marsch(Mozart)
21 Ungarische Tanze 5
22 O’sole Mio
Kids
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Grandfather’s Clock
Old MacDonald Had A Farm
Twinkle Twinkle, Little Star
Mary Had A Little Lamb
London Bridge
23 La Primavera
24 Trepak
25 Canon (Pachelbel)
26 Ombra maifu
30 Fruhlingslied
31 Praludium
Jingle Bells
27 Sonata (Haydn)
28 Italian Concerto
32 Jagerlied
Silent Night, Holy Night
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Song List
Classical
33 Menuet Antique
34 Fur Elise
Practice
Gracefulness
Practice
7
8
9
43 Beyer 25
The Hunt
44 Beyer 29
35 Turkischer Marsch(Mozart)
36 Standchen
Tender Flower
45 Beyer 34
10 The Young Shepherdess
11 Farewell
46 Beyer 38
37 Humoreske
47 Beyer 42
38 Blumenlied
12 Consolation
13 Austrian Dance
14 Ballad
48 Beyer 46
39 Alpenglockchen
40 Menuett G dur(Beethoven)
41 Venezianisches Gondellied
42 Alpenabendrote
43 Farewell to the Piano
44 Brautchor
49 Beyer 51
50 Beyer 55
15 Sighing
51 Beyer 60
16 The Chatterbox
17 Restlessness
18 Ave Maria
52 Beyer 64
53 Beyer 67
54 Beyer 73
45 Battle of Waterloo
46 Wiener Marsch
19 Tarantella
55 Beyer 78
20 Angelic Harmony
21 Gondola Song
22 The Return
23 The Swallow
24 The Knight Errant
25 Openness
56 Beyer 81
47 Le Coucou
57 Beyer 90
48 Menuett G dur(Bach)
49 Spinnerlied
58 Beyer 93
59 Beyer 98
50 Gavotte
60 Beyer 103
61 Czerny 100- 1
62 Czerny 100-10
63 Czerny 100-20
64 Czerny 100-30
65 Czerny 100-38
66 Czerny 100-43
67 Czerny 100-60
68 Czerny 100-75
69 Czerny 100-86
70 Czerny 100-96
51 Heidenroslein
52 Zigeuner Tanz
26 Invention 1
27 Invention 2
28 Invention 3
29 Invention 4
30 Invention 5
31 Invention 6
32 Invention 7
33 Invention 8
34 Invention 9
35 Invention 10
36 Invention 11
37 Invention 12
38 Invention 13
39 Invention 14
40 Invention 15
41 Beyer 15
53 La Cinquantaine
54 Csikos Post
55 Dolly’s Dreaming Awakening
56 La Violette
57 Frohlicher Landmann
58 Sonatine op.36-1(Clementi)
59 Sonatine op.20-1(Kuhlau)
60 Sonatine No.5(Beethoven)
981a
*
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use
of this material for purposes other than
private, personal enjoyment is a
violation of applicable laws.
Practice
1
2
3
4
5
6
Arabesque
Pastoral
A Small Gathering
Innocence
Progress
The Clear Stream
42 Beyer 21
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters Stored to Internal Memory
Parameters Stored in the User Program
Parameters that switch after the User Program name is
touched for a few moments when <Option> on the User
Program screen is set to “Delayed”
→
“Saving Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 108)
Music Style
Tempo
Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro-
gram name is touched when <Option> on the User Pro-
gram screen is set to “Delayed”
Part Balance
Accompaniment Part
Accompaniment On/Off,
Chord Recognize Mode,
Rotary effect (Slow/Fast),
Organ
Footage (Upper, Lower), Percussion
Selected
Arranger
Settings
Tone, Octave Shift,
Right-hand Tone,
Effect (Type, Control 1, Control 2, On/Off,
Layer Tone,
<Accomp> Setting for
The part to which the effect is added)
Left-hand Tone
Arranger Configuration,
Style Orchestrator, Division
Bass Tone, Chord Tone
Part Balance
Keyboard Parts
Parameters Stored in Memory Backup
Melody
On/Off, Type
→
“Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off (Memory
Backup)” (p. 148)
Intelligent
Split 1, Split 2, On/Off for the Part,
Layer 1, Layer 2, On/Off for the Part,
Keyboard Transpose, Split Point
Keyboard Mode
Pedal Settings
Tuning (Tuning, Key, Stretch Tunings)
Master Tune
Functions Assigning to the Left Pedal and
Center Pedal
Effect: the part to which the effect is added
Metronome: Sound
Bend Range
Count-In: Measures, Sound
Countdown: Sound
Functions Assigning to the Expression Pedal
Performance Pad
Settings
User Function
Language
System
Parameters
Track Assign
Reverb
On/Off, Type, Depth
Reverb: On/Off, Type, Depth
On/Off, Echo (Type, Depth),
Advanced 3D:
Vocal Effects
Transformer Type, Harmonist Type,
Transformer/Harmonist, Music Files Part
On/Off, On/Off for Each Part,
Various Settings
MIDI Settings for
User Program
Bank Select LSB, Bank Select MSB,
Remote Control’s Setting
External Display (Device)
iR Function
Program Change, MIDI Transmit Channel
Equalizer
Each Sliders Level, Master Level
Dynamic Emphasis On/Off, Type
Parameters That are Stored After the
Power is Turned Off
Parameters Stored in the User Program Set
Pedal Shift
Load Next
Touch Screen
Opening Message
Start: On/Off
Auto Demo
BGM: On/Off
USB Driver
Equalizer
User Settings
User Settings
User Settings
Jazz Organ Footage
Piano Designer
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Files That the KR Can Use
What Are Music Files?
■ About the KR Sound Generator
Music Files contain information describing the details of a
musical performance, such as “the C3 key on a keyboard was
pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of force.”
By connecting the external memory to the external memory
port on the KR, the performance information is sent from the
external memory to the piano, and played faithfully by the
piano. This is different than a CD, since the music file does
not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it
possible to erase certain parts, or to change instruments,
tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many
different ways.
The KR come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.
General MIDI
The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to
provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs,
and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices.
Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General
MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the
General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI
sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical
performance.
Regarding Copyright
General MIDI 2
Other than for your own personal enjoyment, any use of the
song data programmed in this instrument without the
consent of the copyright holder is prohibited by law.
Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a
secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the
copyright holder.
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up
where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced
expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that
were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations,
such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be
handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available
sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound
generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry
either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
■ The KR allows you to use the
following music files
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does
not include the new enhancements, is referred to as “General MIDI
1” as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.
● Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland Piano
Digital HP-G/R and KR Series instrument
● Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files
GS Format
Roland’s original music file is made specifically for practicing the
piano. Some follow an instructional curriculum, allowing for a
complete range of lessons, such as “practicing each hand
separately” or “listening to only the accompaniment.”
The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for standardizing the
performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including
support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly
compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of
sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many
details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as
reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format
can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features
when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General
MIDI, Roland’s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM
Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that
have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product
supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be
used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.
● SMF Music Files (720KB/1.44MB format)
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file
that was formulated so that files containing music file could be
widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the
listening device. An enormous variety of music is available,
whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for
Karaoke, etc.
*
If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the
retailer where you purchased your KR.
SMF with Lyrics
XG lite
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that
contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with
Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one
bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.
XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that
defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the
structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1
specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation
format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone
generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play
back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set
of control parameters and effects.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIGITAL PIANO
Model KR-107
Date : Mar. 1, 2005
Version : 1.00
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1
1–16
1–16
1–16
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
x
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
* 2
Mode
**************
Note
Number :
15–113
**************
0–127
0–127
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
O
O
O
O
Velocity
*1
*1
After
Touch
Key’s
Ch’s
x
x
O
O
Pitch Bend
O
O
0, 32
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento time
Data entry
1
O
*1
*1
*1
5
6, 38
7
O
O
O
Volume
10
O
Panpot
*1
*1
11
O
Expression
Hold 1
Control
Change
64
O
65
O
Portamento
Sostenuto
*1
66
O
67
O
Soft
84
O
Portamento control
Effect1 depth
Effect3 depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
*1
91
O (Reverb)
93
O (Chorus)
98, 99
100, 101
O
O
*1
*1
Prog
Change
0–127
**************
O
0–127
: True #
Program number 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
x
x
x
x
x
x
System
Common
System
Real Time
: Clock
: Commands
O
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
O
x
O (120, 126, 127)
: All sound off
O
:
Reset all controllers
Aux
Message
O
: Local Control
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
O (123–125)
O
x
* 1 O x is selectable by SysEx.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1.
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Specifications
Copy
Quantize
Delete
Insert
<Keyboard>
88 keys (Progressive hammer action
keyboard with escapement)
100 levels
Whole
Split (adjustable split point)
Layer
Arranger
Piano Style Arranger
Manual Drums / SFX
Keyboard
Touch Sensitivity
Keyboard Mode
Edit
Erase
Transpose
Part Exchange
Note Edit
PC Edit
Touch the Notes
Replay
Super Tones
Piano Designer
Visual Lesson
Wonderland/Game
Demo
<Sound Generator>
Conforms to GM2 / GS / XG Lite
Max. Polyphony
Tones
(Tone Search by
terms and by letters)
Temperament
Stretched Tuning
128 voices
Other Functions
6 groups 736 variations (including 8 tone
wheel Organs, 17 drum sets, SFX set)
Audition
Panel Lock
User Image Display
BMP Export
V-LINK
8 types, selectable tonic
2 types
415.3 Hz–466.2 Hz (adjustable in
increments of 0.1 Hz)
Master Tuning
<External Storage> USB Memory
Key Transpose (-6–+5 in units of semitone)
Playback Transpose (-24–+24 in units of
semitone)
Reverb (12 types, 127 levels)
Chours, Rotary and 60 other types
Advanced 3D
Transpose
Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0/1),
Roland Original Format (i-Format)
Music Style: MSA, MSD, MSE
Audio File: WAV Format (44.1 kHz 16 bits
linear, stereo)
Playable Software
Effects
Dynamic Emphasis (3 types)
Equalizer (5 bands, Master level)
Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0),
Roland Original Format (i-Format)
Music Style: MSE
Save
<Arranger>
Music Styles
<Internal Memory>
Internal Songs
(Song Search by
terms and by letters)
6 groups 262 styles x 3 types (Style
Orchestrator)
(Style Search by
terms and by letters)
Music Assistant
(Search by terms
and by letters)
Programmable
Music Styles
Over 190 songs
Over 500 sets x 6 presets
Visual Music Assistant
Max. 200 songs on Favorites
Max. 99 User Styles
Max. 99 User Program Sets
User Memory
Style Converter
Style Composer
Melody Intelligence 24 types
<Others>
Rated Power Output 60 W x 2
<User Programs>
Internal
External Memory
Speakers
20 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2, 10 cm x 2
36
Bouncing Beat Indicator
Graphical Color LCD 320 x 240 dot (backlit
LCD)
Max. 99 sets
Display
<Metronome>
Tempo
Grand staff / G Clef staff / F Clef staff,
with note name /lyrics/ chords / fingering
English / Japanese / German / French /
Spanish
Notation
Quarter note = 10–500
2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8,
6/8, 9/8, 12/8
Language
Beat
Lyrics
Yes (built-in, external display, MIDI output)
One Touch Piano
One Touch Arranger
Volume
Metronome Pattern
Metronome Sound
10 levels
11 patterns
8 types
One Touch Program
Damper Pedal (half-pedal recognition)
Soft Pedal (half-pedal recognition,
functions assignable)
Sostenuto Pedal (functions assignable)
Echo
Voice Transformer
Vocal Keyboard
Harmonist
<Composer>
Tracks
Song
Note Storage
Resolution
Pedals
5 tracks / 16 tracks
1 song
Approx. 30,000 notes
120 ticks per quarter note
Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In,
Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo)
Step (Chord Sequencer)
Beat Map
Vocal Effects
Recording Method
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Specifications
USB memory connector
FDD connector
Output jacks (L/Mono, R)
Input jacks (L/Mono, R)
Mic Input jack
Headphones jack (Stereo) x 2
MIDI In connector x 2
MIDI Out connector
Connectors
USB connector
Ext Display connector (15-pin D-Sub type)
Video Out jack
Expression Pedal jack
AC 115 V, AC 117 V, AC 220 V, AC 230 V,
AC 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Power Supply
Power Consumption 155 W
1421 (W) x 550 (D) x 901 (H) mm
56 (W) x 21-11/16 (D) x 35-1/2 (H) inches
Including the music rest
1421 (W) x 550 (D) x 1116 (H) mm
56 (W) x 21-11/16 (D) x 43-15/16 (H) inches
Dimensions
(including the piano
stand)
Weights (including
the piano stand)
84 kg / 187 lbs
Quick Start
Owner’s Manual
Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces
Remote Control
Dry-cell Batteries
Accessories
USB Installation Guide
CD-ROM (Roland Digital Piano USB
Driver)
Power cord
Headphones Hook
Anti-theft lock screws
USB Memory
Options
Floppy Disk Drive
*
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or
appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior
notice.
962a
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Numerics
16-Track Sequencer ..........................................................114
A
Accompaniment
Arranger basic screen ........................................................59
Audio Equipment ............................................................163
Auto Punch-In/Out .........................................................119
Automatic Accompaniment ...............................................47
AutoSync DigiScore ...........................................................75
User Program .............................................................111
Count In .............................................................................83
B
Balance Knob .....................................................................63
Beat
A song ........................................................................105
User Style ...................................................................136
Bend Range ......................................................................146
Erasing
C
Chord Type .......................................................................49
Chords .........................................................................49, 77
Clef L .................................................................................78
Clef R .................................................................................78
Color Notation ...................................................................78
Composer MIDI Out ........................................................163
Performance on specific tracks .....................................97
Recorded performance .................................................97
Error Messages ................................................................171
Export ................................................................................79
Expression Pedal ..............................................................156
Ext Display connector ......................................................157
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
F
Factory Setting
Removing .....................................................................70
Fill In To Original ..............................................................47
[Fwd] button ......................................................................66
MIDI Devices ...................................................................160
Multitrack Recording .......................................................114
Mute ..........................................................................84, 115
G
GS ....................................................................................185
GS Format ........................................................................185
H
I
i-format ............................................................................104
Insert (Song Edit) .............................................................125
[Intro/Ending] button .......................................................55
iR function .......................................................................150
K
L
Language .........................................................................147
N
Layer ..................................................................................26
Layer tone ..........................................................................26
Leading bass ....................................................................145
Lid .....................................................................................18
New Song ..........................................................................91
Notation .............................................................................74
Saving as image data ....................................................79
Settings .........................................................................76
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Note Edit (Song Edit) .......................................................127
O
One Touch Settings ..........................................................139
Settings ......................................................................138
[Original] button ................................................................58
Recording ..........................................................................90
Along with a Song ........................................................95
Redoing recordings ......................................................96
With Accompaniment ..................................................93
[Reset] button ....................................................................66
P
PC Edit (Song Edit) ..........................................................127
Pedal jack .........................................................................156
All of the internal songs ...............................................65
Power On and Off .............................................................18
[Power] switch ...................................................................18
Preset .................................................................................51
Program Change ..............................................................163
PU (Pickup) .......................................................................98
Punch-in Recording .........................................................119
Effects screen ................................................................36
Equalizer screen .....................................................34–35
File screen ..................................................................100
Functions screen .........................................................142
Load User Program screen .........................................110
Marker screen ..............................................................85
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Style Converter ................................................................132
Notation screen ............................................................74
Program Change Screen .............................................161
Save Song screen ........................................................102
Save Style screen ........................................................135
Song Edit screen .........................................................122
Song Search screen .......................................................68
Song Selection screen ...................................................65
Style Composer screen ...............................................131
Style Search screen .......................................................52
Tone search screen .......................................................25
Transpose screen ..........................................................88
User Program screen ..................................................108
Write User Program screen ........................................108
Tempo [-] [+] buttons .........................................................81
Transpose (Song Edit) ......................................................125
Search
Song .............................................................................68
Speaker Cable ....................................................................17
Split ...................................................................................62
Split Point ........................................................................139
[Start/Stop] button ............................................................55
Stretch Tuning .................................................................143
Style Composer ...............................................................130
Copying .....................................................................111
Deleting ......................................................................111
Loading ......................................................................110
Registering .................................................................108
Saving ........................................................................109
Transmitting PC Numbers .........................................113
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Deleting .....................................................................136
V
[Variation] button ..............................................................58
V-LINK ............................................................................159
[Vocal Effect] button ..........................................................37
Volume
Metronome ..................................................................45
Microphone ..................................................................20
Overall .........................................................................19
[Volume] knob ...................................................................19
W
[Wonderland] button........................................................ QS 19
X
XG lite ..............................................................................185
Z
Zoom .................................................................................77
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland
distributor in your country as shown below.
PHILIPPINES
COSTA RICA
TRINIDAD
NORWAY
JORDAN
AFRICA
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales
AMR Ltd
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
Ground Floor
Kontor Norge
FREDDY FOR MUSIC
P. O. Box 922846
Amman 11192 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 5692696
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868) 638 6385
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: (02) 899 9801
TEL: 2273 0074
SINGAPORE
SWEE LEE MUSIC
COMPANY PTE. LTD.
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa
1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
POLAND
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
TEL: 243-6399
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
PORTUGAL
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-
5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop(PTY)Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
OMAN
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
Malatan House No.1
Al Noor Street, Ruwi
SULTANATE OF OMAN
TEL: 2478 3443
FAX: (011) 403 1234
EUROPE
TEL:(593-4)2302364
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
TEL: (266) 364 609
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo II,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
THAILAND
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
RUSSIA
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
QATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &
Stores)
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
Austrian Office
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
VIETNAM
SAIGON MUSIC
DISTRIBUTOR
(TAN DINH MUSIC)
138 Tran Quang Khai Street
Dist. 1, Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: 262-0788
SPAIN
ASIA
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
GUATEMALA
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
SWEDEN
TEL:(502) 599-2888
TEL: (08) 848-4068
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
HONDURAS
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
TEL: (014) 575811
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
CZECH REP.
K-AUDIO
Kardasovska 626.
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,
CZECH REP.
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
MARTINIQUE
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
TEL: (2) 666 10529
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
DENMARK
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie
Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
TEL: (020) 8736-0428
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: (011) 223-5384
UKRAINE
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo,
UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
TURKEY
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
Galip Dede Cad. No.37
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
TEL: 3916 6200
For Australia
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
UNITED KINGDOM
MEXICO
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
TEL: 2415 0911
TEL: (04) 3360715
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
Parsons Music Ltd.
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
NORTH AMERICA
MIDDLE EAST
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
CANADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way
Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4
CANADA
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
BARBADOS
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
TEL: (505)277-2557
PANAMA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE
PANAMA
TEL: 17 211 005
HUNGARY
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
TEL: 315-0101
TEL: (23) 511011
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (595) 21 492147
TEL: (022) 66-9426
TEL: (905) 362 9707
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
U. S. A.
KOREA
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
PERU
Audionet
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
TEL: (021) 285-4169
TEL: (323) 890 3700
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, Colombia
MALAYSIA
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
TEL: (574)3812529
As of August 1, 2005 (ROLAND)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Renesas Power Supply PCA4933 User Guide
Roberts Radio Portable Radio WM201 User Guide
Rolls DJ Equipment RDB104 User Guide
Rosewill Computer Drive R2 JBOD User Guide
Samsung Headphones WEP490 User Guide
Samsung Speaker System WSP200 User Guide
Sanyo Digital Camera Vpc S880 User Guide
Sanyo Flat Panel Television ST 21KS2 User Guide
Seagate Computer Drive ST1000NM0041 User Guide
Senco Staple Gun YK0321 User Guide